A3 Mono Copier: SCX-82x0 Series SCX-8240NA / SCX-8230NA

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 399

A3 Mono Copier

SCX-82x0 series
SCX-8240NA / SCX-8230NA
(Ver 2.01)

A3 Mono Copier Contents

1. Precautions

2. Product Description

3. Replacement Procedure

4. Service Mode

5. Updating Firmware

6. Preventive Maintenance

7. Troubleshooting

8. System Diagram

9. System Recovery

10. Reference Information


Contents

1. Precautions .................................................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Safety Warning.........................................................................................................................................1-1

1.2 Caution for safety ...................................................................................................................................1-2

1.3 ESD Precautions.......................................................................................................................................1-5

2. Product description ..................................................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................2-1

2.2 System configuration ............................................................................................................................2-7

2.3 Sensor location ..................................................................................................................................... 2-16

2.4 Paper handling section ..................................................................................................................... 2-20

2.4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 2-20

2.4.2 Components................................................................................................................................... 2-23

22.4.3 Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 2-24

2.4.4 Paper tray ........................................................................................................................................ 2-25

2.4.5 Pick up unit .................................................................................................................................... 2-26

2.4.6 Registration unit ........................................................................................................................ 2-27

2.4.7 MPF unit ........................................................................................................................................ 2-28

2.5 Image creation ...................................................................................................................................... 2-29

2.5.1 Printing process overview ..................................................................................................... 2-29

2.5.2 Imaging unit .................................................................................................................................. 2-30

2.5.2.1 Imaging unit overview ................................................................................................. 2-30

2.5.2.2 Drum drive ........................................................................................................................... 2-31

2.5.2.3 Development ...................................................................................................................... 2-32

2.6 Fuser unit ................................................................................................................................................. 2-34


2.6.1 Fuser unit overview..................................................................................................................... 2-34

2.6.2 Fuser unit components ............................................................................................................. 2-35

2.6.3 Fuser unit drive............................................................................................................................. 2-36

2.6.4 Temperature control .................................................................................................................. 2-37

2.7 Laser Scanning Unit ............................................................................................................................ 2-38

2.7.1 Laser Scanning Unit overview .............................................................................................. 2-38

2.7.2 Laser Scanning Optical path ................................................................................................ 2-39

2.7.3 Laser synchronizing detectors ............................................................................................. 2-40

2.8 Printer Drive system ........................................................................................................................... 2-41

2.8.1 Drive Motors .................................................................................................................................. 2-41

2.8.2 Main drive unit ............................................................................................................................. 2-43

2.8.3 Pick-up Drive ................................................................................................................................. 2-44

2.8.4 Fuser/Exit Drive ............................................................................................................................. 2-45

2.8.5 Toner Duct drive .......................................................................................................................... 2-46

2.8.6 Drive of Toner Supply ............................................................................................................... 2-46

2.8.7 WTB leveling drive ...................................................................................................................... 2-47

2.8.8 PR Release drive........................................................................................................................... 2-47

2.9 Scanner system ..................................................................................................................................... 2-48

2.9.1 Scanner System overview ...................................................................................................... 2-48

2.9.2 Scanning System components ............................................................................................ 2-49

2.10 DADF ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-51

2.10.1 DADF System overview ........................................................................................................ 2-51

2.10.2 Electric parts layout.................................................................................................................. 2-54

2.10.3 DADF Drive System .................................................................................................................. 2-55

2.10.3.1 DADF Original Drive assembly ............................................................................... 2-56


2.10.3.2 DADF Original registration drive assembly ...................................................... 2-57

2.10.3.3 DADF Original feed drive assembly .................................................................... 2-58

2.10.3.4 DADF Exit drive assembly ........................................................................................ 2-59

22.10.3.5 DADF Gate drive assembly ................................................................................... 2-60

2.11 Hardware configuration .................................................................................................................. 2-61

2.11.1 Main controller ........................................................................................................................... 2-64

2.11.1.1 MSOK ................................................................................................................................... 2-66

2.11.1.2 Fax-Joint PBA ................................................................................................................... 2-66

2.11.1.3 Primary Modem Card ................................................................................................... 2-67

2.11.1.4 Secondary Modem Card ............................................................................................. 2-68

2.11.1.5 FDI ...................................................................................................................................... 2-69

2.11.2 OPE Controller ............................................................................................................................ 2-71

2.11.2.1 Sub Key PBA ..................................................................................................................... 2-73

2.11.2.2 USB Hub Controller PBA ............................................................................................. 2-74

2.11.3 DADF Controller ........................................................................................................................ 2-75

2.11.4 Interface Part ............................................................................................................................... 2-76

2.11.5 Connection Part ......................................................................................................................... 2-76

2.11.6 SMPS 1........................................................................................................................................... 2-77

2.11.7 SMPS 2........................................................................................................................................... 2-79

2.11.8 FDB .................................................................................................................................................. 2-81

2.11.9 HVPS ............................................................................................................................................... 2-82

2.11.10 Eraser PBA.................................................................................................................................. 2-83

2.11.11 Side Joint PBA .......................................................................................................................... 2-83

2.11.12 Fuser PBA ................................................................................................................................... 2-84

2.11.13 Waste Sensor PBA .................................................................................................................. 2-84


2.11.14 LED Panel PBA ......................................................................................................................... 2-84

2.11.15 Crum PBA ................................................................................................................................... 2-85

2.11.16 Deve Crum Joint PBA ........................................................................................................... 2-85

2.11.17 Toner Crum Joint PBA .......................................................................................................... 2-85

2.11.18 Scan Joint PBA ......................................................................................................................... 2-86

2.11.19 CCDM PBA ................................................................................................................................. 2-87

2.11.20 WLED CTL PBA ......................................................................................................................... 2-88

2.11.21 WLED AL Front PBA............................................................................................................... 2-88

3. Replacement produce .............................................................................................................................3-1

3.1 General precautions on disassembly ...........................................................................................3-1

3.2 Cover ............................................................................................................................................................3-2

3.2.1 Front cover ........................................................................................................................................3-2

3.2.2 Left cover............................................................................................................................................3-3

3.2.3 Rear cover ..........................................................................................................................................3-4

3.2.4 Right cover ........................................................................................................................................3-5

3.3. OPE Unit.....................................................................................................................................................3-6

3.3.1 OPE assembly ...................................................................................................................................3-6

3.3.2 OPE PBA and LCD panel .............................................................................................................3-8

3.3.3 Key buttons .................................................................................................................................... 3-11

3.4 Scan unit .................................................................................................................................................. 3-12

3.4.1 Scanner Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 3-13

3.4.2 Scan Glass ....................................................................................................................................... 3-16

3.4.3 Lamp Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 3-17

3.4.4 Scanner Board ............................................................................................................................... 3-19

3.4.5 Scanner paper sensor ................................................................................................................ 3-20


3.5 Fuser unit ................................................................................................................................................. 3-21

3.5.1 Fuser cover ..................................................................................................................................... 3-22

3.5.2 Draw connector ............................................................................................................................ 3-23

3.5.3 Halogen lamp ................................................................................................................................ 3-25

3.5.4 Heat roller ....................................................................................................................................... 3-26

3.5.5 Pressure roller ............................................................................................................................... 3-26

3.6 Side Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 3-27

3.6.1 Duplex sensor................................................................................................................................ 3-28

3.6.2 Transfer sensor ............................................................................................................................. 3-29

3.6.3 MP unit............................................................................................................................................. 3-31

3.6.3.1 MP Solenoid ........................................................................................................................ 3-33

3.7 Electrical components ........................................................................................................................ 3-36

3.7.1 Main board ..................................................................................................................................... 3-36

3.7.2 Storage (HDD) ............................................................................................................................... 3-38

3.7.3 Toner PBA, Toner Motor .......................................................................................................... 3-39

3.7.4 Lift Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 3-40

3.7.5 FDB ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-41

3.7.6 HVPS .................................................................................................................................................. 3-42

3.7.7 SMPS ................................................................................................................................................. 3-43

3.7.8 SMPS Fan ........................................................................................................................................ 3-44

3.7.9 Ozone filter Fan............................................................................................................................ 3-45

3.7.10. Side Joint PBA ........................................................................................................................... 3-46

3.7.11 Eraser Lamp ................................................................................................................................. 3-47

3.7.12. Waste Sensor PBA ................................................................................................................... 3-48

3.7.16 Temperature sensor ................................................................................................................. 3-49


3.7.16.1 Outer Temperature sensor ......................................................................................... 3-49

3.7.16.2 Inner Temperature sensor .......................................................................................... 3-49

3.8 Main Drive unit ..................................................................................................................................... 3-50

3.8.1 Main Drive Motor ........................................................................................................................ 3-51

3.8.2 Main Drive Clutch........................................................................................................................ 3-51

3.9 Exit Drive unit ........................................................................................................................................ 3-52

3.8.1 Exit Drive Motor ........................................................................................................................... 3-53

3.10 Toner Duct Drive unit ...................................................................................................................... 3-54

3.11 PR Release Drive unit ...................................................................................................................... 3-55

3.12 Pick-up Drive unit ............................................................................................................................. 3-56

3.13 WTB Leveling Drive unit ................................................................................................................. 3-57

3.14 LSU ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-60

3.15 Frame-Duct .......................................................................................................................................... 3-63

3.16 DADF ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-64

3.16.1 DADF Cover ............................................................................................................................... 3-65

3.16.2 DADF Open Cover .................................................................................................................. 3-67

3.16.3 DADF Stacker .............................................................................................................................. 3-67

3.16.4 DADF main board ..................................................................................................................... 3-68

3.16.5 DADF motor, solenoid, clutch ........................................................................................... 3-69

3.16.6 DADF Detect/ Cover/ Regi sensor .................................................................................. 3-71

3.16.7 DADF Exit Idle sensor.............................................................................................................. 3-72

3.16.8 DADF Exit sensor ....................................................................................................................... 3-72

3.16.9 DADF Length, Width sensor................................................................................................. 3-73

3.17 Exit unit .................................................................................................................................................. 3-74

3.18 Regi. unit ............................................................................................................................................... 3-76


3.19 Pick-Up Unit......................................................................................................................................... 3-78

3.20 Cassette heating cable .................................................................................................................... 3-80

4. Service Mode .................................................................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Entering/Exiting Service Mode .......................................................................................................4-1

4 2 Service Mode Menu Tree .................................................................................................................4-2

4.2.1 Information Tab...............................................................................................................................4-2

4.2.2 Maintenance Counts Tab ............................................................................................................4-4

4.2.3 Diagnostics Tab Menu .................................................................................................................4-5

4.2.4 Service Functions ............................................................................................................................4-5

4.3 Information ................................................................................................................................................4-6

4.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................4-6

4.3.2 Supply Status ....................................................................................................................................4-6

4.3.2.1 Customer Replacement Unit (CRU) ...........................................................................4-6

4.3.2.2 Field Replacement Unit (FRU) ......................................................................................4-6

4.3.3 Software Version .............................................................................................................................4-8

4.3.4 Service Hours....................................................................................................................................4-8

4.3.5 Fault Log .............................................................................................................................................4-8

4.3.6 Print Report .......................................................................................................................................4-9

4.4 Maintenance Counts........................................................................................................................... 4-10

4.4.1 Fault Count ..................................................................................................................................... 4-10

4.4.2 Jam Count ....................................................................................................................................... 4-11

4.4.3 Part Replacement Count .......................................................................................................... 4-13

4.5 Diagnostics.............................................................................................................................................. 4-14

4.5.1 Engine Diagnostics...................................................................................................................... 4-14

4.5.1.1 NVM Read/Write............................................................................................................... 4-14


4.5.1.2 Engine Test Routines ...................................................................................................... 4-16

4.5.2 Fax Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................. 4-21

4.5.2.1 Fax NVM Read/Write ...................................................................................................... 4-21

4.5.2.2 Fax Test Routines .............................................................................................................. 4-22

4.5.3 Scanner Diagnostics ................................................................................................................... 4-24

4.5.3.1 Shading Test ....................................................................................................................... 4-24

4.5.3.2 Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write ............................................................................... 4-24

4.5.3.3 Scanner/DADF Test Routines....................................................................................... 4-25

4.5.4 Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................... 4-27

4.5.4.1 Print Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 4-27

4.5.4.2 Copy Adjustment .............................................................................................................. 4-29

4.5.4.3 Scan Area Adjustment .................................................................................................... 4-30

4.5.4.4 DADF Adjustment ................................................................................................................ 4-32

4.5.4.5 Finisher Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 4-34

4.5.4.6 Buckle Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 4-37

4.5.5 ACS..................................................................................................................................................... 4-38

4.5.6 Color Management ..................................................................................................................... 4-39

4.5.6.1 Scan CTD ................................................................................................................................ 4-39

4.6 Service Functions ................................................................................................................................. 4-41

4.6.1 Main Memory Clear.................................................................................................................... 4-41

4.6.2 Hard Disk Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 4-41

4.6.3 Debug Log ...................................................................................................................................... 4-41

4.6.4 Port .................................................................................................................................................... 4-42

4.6.5 Capture Log ................................................................................................................................... 4-42

4.6.6 Toner Save ...................................................................................................................................... 4-42


4.6.7 Count Setting of Large Page.................................................................................................. 4-42

4.6.8 System Recovery .......................................................................................................................... 4-42

4.6.9 User Data Management ........................................................................................................... 4-43

4.6.10 TR Control Mode ...................................................................................................................... 4-44

4.6.11 Cool Down Mode...................................................................................................................... 4-45

5. Updating Firmware .....................................................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Updating from the Printer Control Panel ..................................................................................5-2

5.2 Updating from the Network ............................................................................................................5-7

6. Preventive Maintenance ........................................................................................................................6-1

6.1 PM Supplies...............................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 PM Parts .............................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.2 PM KIT .................................................................................................................................................6-4

6.2 PM Procedures .........................................................................................................................................6-5

6.2.1 Toner cartridge ................................................................................................................................6-5

6.2.2 Imaging unit .....................................................................................................................................6-7

6.2.3 Transfer roller Unit ...................................................................................................................... 6-11

6.2.4 Fuser unit ........................................................................................................................................ 6-12

6.2.5 Pick up / Retard / Forward roller ....................................................................................... 6-13

6.2.6 Ozone filter..................................................................................................................................... 6-13

6.2.7 DADF Rollers (Pick up/ ADF/ Retard) ............................................................................... 6-14

6.2.8 MP Pick up / Retard / Forward roller .............................................................................. 6-19

6.2.9 Scanner Fan Filter ........................................................................................................................ 6-21

6.3 Cleaning the PM parts....................................................................................................................... 6-22

6.3.1 Cleaning the charge scorotron.............................................................................................. 6-22

6.3.2 Cleaning the pick up roller ..................................................................................................... 6-22


6.3.3 Cleaning the Regi roller............................................................................................................ 6-23

6.3.4 Cleaning the tray1 feed roller ................................................................................................ 6-23

6.3.5 Cleaning the tray2 feed roller ................................................................................................ 6-24

6.3.6 Cleaning the DADF retard rubber pad ............................................................................ 6-25

6.3.7 Cleaning the DADF rollers ....................................................................................................... 6-26

6.3.8 Cleaning the ADF glass............................................................................................................. 6-27

7. Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................................................7-1

7.1 Procedure for checking symptoms ...............................................................................................7-1

7.1.1 System power-up sequence ......................................................................................................7-1

7.1.2 Pre-troubleshooting check list .................................................................................................7-2

7.2 Error code and Trobleshooting ......................................................................................................7-3

7.2.1 Error code and error message.............................................................................................7-A-3

7.2.2 Error Code Details ....................................................................................................................... 7-12

7.3 Image quality problems and solutions ..................................................................................7-110

7.3.1 Vertical Lines ................................................................................................................................7-111

7.3.2 Horizontal Lines..........................................................................................................................7-112

7.3.3 White spot ....................................................................................................................................7-113

7.3.4 Color or Black background ...................................................................................................7-114

7.3.5 Blurred image ..............................................................................................................................7-115

7.3.6 Uneven pitch and jitter image.............................................................................................7-116

7.3.7 Skewed image .............................................................................................................................7-117

7.3.8 Low image density ....................................................................................................................7-118

7.3.9 Blank copy , Black copy ..........................................................................................................7-119

7.3.10 Uneven density in sub scan direction (Horizontal band) ...................................7-121

7.3.11 Uneven density in main scan direction (Vertical Band) ......................................7-122


7.3.12 Poor fusing performance.....................................................................................................7-123

7.3.13 Stain on the paper back side ............................................................................................7-124

7.3.14 DADF skew testing .................................................................................................................7-125

7.4 Other errors ..........................................................................................................................................7-130

7.4.1 OPE problem ...............................................................................................................................7-130

7.4.2 USB port problem .....................................................................................................................7-133

7.4.3 FDI device problem ..................................................................................................................7-134

8. System Diagram ...........................................................................................................................................8-1

8.1 Engine 1 ......................................................................................................................................................8-1

8.2 Engine 2 ......................................................................................................................................................8-2

8.3 Engine 3 ......................................................................................................................................................8-3

8.4 Scan & DADF ............................................................................................................................................8-4

8.5 Heater & Fuse ..........................................................................................................................................8-5

9. System Recovery ..........................................................................................................................................9-1

9.1 Entry Point..................................................................................................................................................9-1

9.2 USB ................................................................................................................................................................9-2

9.3 Network .......................................................................................................................................................9-4

9.4 Confirmation Page ...............................................................................................................................9-5

9.5 Error Page...................................................................................................................................................9-6

9.6 Progress Page ...........................................................................................................................................9-8

9.7 Error List ......................................................................................................................................................9-8

9.8 HDD Repair ............................................................................................................................................. 9-10

9.9 HDD Failure ............................................................................................................................................ 9-11

10. Reference Information ...................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.1 Tools for Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 10-1


10.2 Abbreviations ...................................................................................................................................... 10-4
1. Preca
autions

1. Warning and caution


n for safety
In order to prevent accidents and to prevent damage to o the equipment please read the precautions listed
below carefully before servicing the printer and follow them closely.

1.1 Safety Warning


(1) Only to be serviced by appropriately qualified service technician.
High voltages and lasers inside this product are dangerous. This printer should only be serviced by a
qualified service technician.

(2) Use only Samsung replacement parts parts.


There are no user serviceable parts inside the printter. Do not make any unauthorized changes or
additions to the printer as these could cause the printer to malfunction and create an electric shock or
fire hazards.

(3) Laser Safety Statement


The Printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to thee requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1
Subchapter J for Class 1(1) laser products, and els sewhere, it is certified as a Class I laser product con-
f
forming
i tto the
th requirements
i t off IEC 825.
825 Class
Cl I las
l er products
d t are nott considered
id d tto bbe h
hazardous.
d Th
The
laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a
Class I level during normal operation, user mainten nance, or prescribed service condition.

Warning >> Never operate or service the printer with the


t protective cover removed from Laser Scanner
assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
ons should always be followed to reduce risk of fire,
When using this product, these basic safety pre-cautio
electric shock, and personal injury.

1--1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
1. Preca
autions

1.2 Caution for safety

1.2.1 Toxic material


This product contains toxic materials that could cause illness
i if ingested.
(1) If the LCD control panel is damaged it is possible fo or the liquid inside to leak. This liquid is toxic. Contact
with the skin should be avoided. Wash any splashe es from eyes or skin immediately and contact your
doctor. If the liquid gets into the mouth or is swallow
wed see a doctor immediately.
(2) Please keep Drum cartridge and Toner cartridge aw
way from children. The toner powder contained in the
Drum cartridge and Toner Cartridge may be harmfuul and if swallowed you should contact a doctor.

1.2.2 Electric shock and fire safety precautions


p
Failure to follow the following instructions could cause electric
e shock or potentially cause a fire.
(1) Use only the correct voltage, failure to do so could damaged the printer and potentially cause a fire or
electric shock.
((2)) Use onlyy the power
p cable supplied
pp with the p
printer. Use of an incorrectlyy specified
p cable could cause the
cable to overheat and potentially cause a fire.
(3) Do not overload the power socket, this could lead to o overheating of the cables inside the wall and could
lead to a fire.
(4) Do not allow water or other liquids to spill into the printer, this can cause electric shock. Do not allow
paper clips, pins or other foreign objects to fall into the printer these could cause a short circuit leading
to an electric shock or fire hazard.
((5)) Never touch the p plugs
g on either end of the p power ca able with wet hands, this can cause electric shock.
When servicing the printer remove the power plug from f the wall socket.
(6) Use caution when inserting or removing the power connector.
c When removing the power connector, grip it
firmly and pull. The power connector must be insertted completely, otherwise a poor contact could cause
overheating possibly leading to a fire.
(7) Take care of the power cable. Do not allow it to bec come twisted, bent sharply around corners or wise
damaged. Do not place objects on top of the powerr cable. If the power cable is damaged it could
overheat and cause a fire. Exposed cables could ca ause an electric shock. Replace the damaged power
cable immediately
immediately, do not reuse or repair the dama aged cable
cable. Some chemicals can attack the coating on
the power cable, weakening the cover or exposing cables causing fire and shock risks.
(8) Ensure that the power sockets and plugs are not cra acked or broken in any way. Any such defects
should be repaired immediately. Take care not to cut or damage the power cable or plugs when moving
the machine.
(9) Use caution during thunder or lightning storms. Sam msung recommends that this machine be disconnected
from the power source when such weather conditio ons are expected. Do not touch the machine or the
power cord if it is still connected to the wall socket in
p i these weather conditions.
(10) Avoid damp or dusty areas, install the printer in a cleanc well ventilated location. Do not position the
machine near a humidifier or in front of an air cond ditioner. Moisture and dust built up inside the machine
can lead to overheating and cause a fire or cause parts to rust.
(11) Do not position the printer in direct sunlight. This will
w cause the temperature inside the printer to rise
possibly leading to the printer failing to work prope erly and in extreme conditions could lead to a fire.
(12) Do not insert any metal objects into the machine th hrough the ventilator fan or other part of the casing, it
could make contact with a high voltage conductor inside the machine and cause an electric shock.

1--2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
1. Preca
autions

1.2.3 Handling Precautions


The following instructions are for your own personal sa
afety, to avoid injury and so as not to damage the
product.

(1) Ensure the printer is installed on a level surface


surface, ca
apable of supporting its weight.
weight Failure to do so could
cause the printer to tip or fall.
(2) The printer contains many rollers, gears and fans. Take great care to ensure that you do not catch your
vices.
fingers, hair or clothing in any of these rotating dev
(3) Do not place any small metal objects, containers of o water, chemicals or other liquids close to the printer
which if spilled could get into the machine and cau use damage, shock or fire hazard.
(4) Do not install the machine in areas with high dust oro moisture levels, beside on open window or close to
a humidifier or heater. Damage g could be caused to o the p
printer in such areas.
(5) Do not place candles, burning cigarettes, etc on the printer, These could cause a fire.
(6) When reinstalling the imaging unit or ITB unit at po ower off, perform the OPC-ACR surely.

1.2.4 Assembly / Disassembly Precau


utions
Replace parts carefully and always use Samsung partts. Take care to note the exact location of parts and
cable routing before dismantling any part of the machine. Ensure all parts and cables are replaced correctly.
Please carry out the following procedures before dismantling the printer or replacing any parts.
(1) Check the contents of the machine memory and make a note of any user settings. These will be erased
if the main board or network card is replaced.
(2) Ensure that power is disconnected before servicing g or replacing any electrical parts.
(3) Disconnect printer interface cables and power cablles les.
(4) Only use approved spare parts. Ensure that part nu umber, product name, voltage, current and
temperature rating are correct.
(5) When removing or re-fitting any parts do not use ex xcessive force, especially when fitting screws into
plastic.
(6) Take care not to drop any small parts into the machine.
(7) Handling of the OPC Drum
- The OPC Drum can be irreparably damaged if it e exposed to light
light.
Take care not to expose the OPC Drum either to directd sunlight or to fluorescent or incandescent
room lighting. Exposure for as little as 5 minutes can
c damage the surface of the photoconductive
properties and will result in print quality degradatio
on. Take extra care when servicing the printer.
Remove the OPC Drum and store it in a black bag g or other lightproof container. Take care when
working with the Covers (especially the top cover)) open as light is admitted to the OPC area and can
damage the OPC Drum.
- Take care not to scratch the green surface of OPC C Drum Unit.
If the green surface of the Drum Cartridge is scrattched or touched the print quality will be
compromised.

1--3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
1. Preca
autions

1.2.5 Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

(1) Be careful with high temperature components.


ution when working on the printer. Wait for the fuser to
The fuser unit works at a high temperature. Use cau
cool down before disassembly.

(2) Do not put fingers or hair into the rotating parts.


When operating a printer, keep your hands and hairr away form the rotating parts (Paper feeding entrance,
motor, fan, etc.).

(3) When moving the printer :

- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ fo our people and be sure to hold the lifting handles.
- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, DADF) when transporting the
equipment.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with 110V/220V pow wer input.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
ve heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessiv
sunlight.
- Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
q p
- The equipment must be installed near the socket outlet and must be accessible.
-Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely afte er the installation so that no one trips over it.
-If you are moving the machine a short distance, you sh hould separate the finisher.
(e.g : same building through elevator)
- If you are moving the machine a long distance, you should
s remove toner & imaging unit, lock scan carrier
& staple unit, tape and disassemble all trays. (e.g : mo oved by truck or so)

1--4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
1. Preca
autions

1.3 ESD Precautions

Certain semiconductor devices can be easily damaged d by static electricity. Such components are
commonly called “Electrostatically Sensitive (ES) Devices” or ESDs. Examples of typical ESDs are:
integrated circuits,
circuits some field effect transistors,
transistors and se
emiconductor “chip”
chip components.
components
The techniques outlined below should be followed to help
h reduce the incidence of component damage
caused by static electricity.

Caution >>Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit, and observe all other safety precautions.

1. Immediately before handling a semiconductor comp ponent or semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain


off any electrostatic charge on your body by touchin
ng a known earth ground. Alternatively, employ a
commercially available wrist strap device, which shoould be removed for
f your personal safety
f reasons
prior to applying power to the unit under test.
2. After removing an electrical assembly equipped with
h ESDs, place the assembly on a conductive surface,
such as aluminum or copper foil, or conductive foam
m, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup in the
vicinity of the assembly.
3. Use only a grounded tip soldering iron to solder or desolder
d ESDs.
4 Use only an “anti
4. anti-static
static” solder removal device
device. Som me solder removal devices not classified as “anti
anti-
static” can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ESDs.
5. Do not use Freon-propelled chemicals. When spray
yed, these can generate electrical charges sufficient to
damage ESDs.
6. Do not remove a replacement ESD from its protectiv
ve packaging until immediately before installing it.
Most replacement ESDs are packaged with all leadss shorted together by conductive foam, aluminum foil,
or a comparable conductive material.
7. Immediately before removing the protective shorting g material from the leads of a replacement ESD,
touch the protective material to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed.
8. Maintain continuous electrical contact between the ESDE and the assembly into which it will be installed,
until completely plugged or soldered into the circuit.
9. Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged d replacement ESDs. Normal motions, such as
the brushing together of clothing fabric and lifting on
ne’s foot from a carpeted floor, can generate static
electricity sufficient to damage an ESD
ESD.

1--5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2. Product description
2.1 Specifications

2.1.1 Product Overview

 Print and Copy Speed (Mono)


SCX-8230NA : Up to 30 ppm in A4
SCX-8240NA : Up to 40 ppm in A4

 Scan Speed
40 ipm @ 300 dpi

 Dual Core CPU 1GHz

 HDD : 320GB

 2GB Memory

 Toner Cartridge
Initial : 20,000 pages
Sales : 20,000 / 35,000 pages 2 types

 Option
: HCF, DCF, Standard Finisher(1K)
Booklet Finisher(3K), Fax etc.

 10.1 inch full color LCD

 XOA(eXtensible Open Architecture)


SCX-8230/8240 series

2-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.1.2 Specifications
General Specifications

Item SCX-8230NA SCX-8240NA

Printing Speed (A4) 30 ppm 40 ppm

FCOT < 7 sec < 5.5 sec

Warm-up Time < 25 sec

Duplex Printing Speed 30 ppm 40 ppm

40 ipm @ 600 dpi


Scanning Speed (A4) (Color)
60 ipm @ 300 dpi

Memory 2GB

HDD 320 GB

CPU 1GHz

• Optical : 600 x 600 dpi


• Enhanced : Draft 600 x 600 x 1bit
Resolution
Default 600 x 600 x 2 bit
Up to 600 x 600 x 4 bit

Gradation 256

Size (W x D x H ) 677.5 x 742.8 x 924 mm (26.7 x 29.2 x 36.4 inches)

Weight Approx. 113Kg (250lb) (Including consumables and tray)

• Ready mode : 37 dB(A)


Noise (dB) • Printing mode : 54 dB(A)
• Copying mode : 57 dB(A)

• Average operating mode : Less than 1,100 W


• Ready mode : Less than 200 W
Power consumption • Low Power mode : Less than 15 W
• Power Save mode : Less than 7 W
• Power off mode : 0 W

AC 110-127V , 50/60 Hz or AC 220-240V , 50/60 Hz


Power requirement Note - See the Rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency
(hertz) and type of current.

AC 110-127V , 50/60 Hz or AC 220-240V , 50/60 Hz


Power output rating for heating Note - See the Rating label on the machine for correct voltage, frequency (hertz)
wire in DCF/HCF and type of current.
The voltage rating of heating wire is the same as the machine’s voltage rating.

2-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Printer Specifications

Item SCX-8230NA SCX-8240NA

Printing method laser beam printing

Printing speed Up to 30 ppm (A4), 30 ppm (Letter) Up to 40 ppm (A4), 40 ppm (Letter)

Duplex printing speed Up to 30 ipm (A4), 30 ipm (Letter) Up to 40 ipm (A4), 40 ipm (Letter)

First print out time


< 9 sec < 8 sec
(from ready)
• Default : Up to 2,400 x 600 dpi effective output(600x600x2 dpi)
Print resolution
• Max : Up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output(600x600x2 dpi)

Printer language PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript 3, PDF 1.7+, TIFF, PJL

• Windows: 2000 ,XP,2003 ,Vista ,2008 ,Win7


OS compatibility • Various Linux OS
• Macintosh: Mac OS X 10.5~10.6

• High speed USB 2.0


Interface • Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX (embedded type)
• FDI (optional)

Copier specifications

Item SCX-8230NA SCX-8240NA

Copy Speed Up to 30 cpm (A4), 30 cpm (Letter) Up to 40 cpm (A4), 40 cpm (Letter)

Simplex to Duplex (1-1,1-2) Simplex to Duplex (1-1,1-2)


: Up to 30 ipm in A4 (30 ipm in Letter) : Up to 40 ipm in A4 (40 ipm in Letter)
Duplex copy speed
Duplex to Duplex (2-1.2-2) Duplex to Duplex (2-1.2-2)
: Up to 18 ipm in A4 (18 ipm in Letter) : Up to 24 ipm in A4 (24 ipm in Letter)

First copy out time < 7 sec < 5.5 sec

• Platen : 600 x 600 dpi


Copy resolution
• Document feeder: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

• Platen : 25% to 400%


Zoom range
• Document feeder: 25% to 400%

2-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Scanner specifications

Item SCX-8230NA SCX-8240NA

Compatibility TWAIN standard (network)

Scanning method Color CCD

Up to 600 x 600 dpi


TWAIN standard
(Up to 4,800 x 4,800 dpi by software enhancement)

Resolution Scan to USB 100, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi

Scan to Email 100, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi

Scan to Server 100, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi

Network Scan File format PDF, TIFF, JPEG

Effective scanning length Max. 432 mm (17 inches)

Effective scanning width Max. 297 mm (11.7 inches)

Internal: 30 bit
Color bit depth
External: 24 bit

1 bit for lineart & halftone


Mono bit depth
8 bit for gray scale

Fax Specifications
Item SCX-8230NA SCX-8240NA

Compatibility Super G3
Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or behind PABX
Data coding MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG

Modem speed 33.6kbps

Transmission speed Up to 3 seconds/page


Maximum document length 432 mm (17 inches)
• Standard : 203 x 98 dpi
• Fine : 203 x 196 dpi
Resolution
• Super Fine : 300 x 300 dpi
• Ultra Fine : 600 x 600 dpi

Memory HDD Backup

Auto dialer up to 500 numbers

2-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Paper Specifications

Item SCX-8230NA SCX-8240NA

• Standard : 1,040 (Cassette 1 & 2) + 100 (MP Tray)


Input Paper Capacity • Maximum : 1,040 (Cassette 1 & 2) + 2,000 (High Capacity Feeder) + 100 (MP Tray)

• Standard : 500 (Center Output Tray)


Output Paper Capacity
• Maximum : 3,250 (Booklet Finisher)

• Cassette : 148 x 210 mm (5.83”x 8.27”) ~ 305 x 457 mm (12”x 18”)


Paper Size • MP Tray : 98 x 148 mm(3.8”x 5.8”) ~ 305 x 1200 mm (12”47”)
• High Capacity Feeder : A4 / Letter

• Cassette : Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper, Bond, Punched, Pre-Printed,
Recycled, Letterhead, Cotton, Colored, Archive, CardStock, Label

• MP Tray : Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper, Bond, Punched, Pre-Printed,
Paper Type Recycled, Letterhead, Cotton, Colored, Archive, CardStock, Label,
Transparency, Envelope

• High Capacity Feeder : Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper, Bond, Punched,
Pre-Printed, Recycled, Cotton, Colored, CardStock

• Cassette : 60 ~ 163 gsm (16lb Bond ~ 90lb Index)


Paper Weight • MP Tray : 60 ~ 216 gsm (16lb Bond ~ 90lb Cover)
• High Capacity Feeder : 60 ~ 163 gsm (16lb Bond ~ 90lb Index)

Original Capacity for DADF 100 sheets

• Full supported Size : 140 X 140mm ~ 297 x 432mm (5.5" x 5.5" ~ A3/Ledger)
Original Size for DADF
• Auto-detected Size : A3, B4, B4 SEF, A4, A4 SEF, B5, B5 SEF, A5, A5 SEF

• Simplex : 42 ~ 163 gsm (30lb Book ~ 90lb Index)


Original Weight for DADF
• Duplex : 50 ~ 128 gsm (30lb Book ~ 34lb Bond)

Consumables

Product Model name Life ** SCX-8230NA SCX-8240NA

MLT-K606S 35,000 pages X* O


Toner Cartridge
MLT-K607S 20,000 pages O O

Imaging unit MLT-R607K 100,000 pages O O

Waste Toner Container MLT-W606 300,000 pages O O

* American 35K Toner can be used for SCX-8230NA


** Declared yield value in accordance with 6% coverage.

2-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Option Unit

Option Unit Model name Remark


Stand CLX-DSK10T/SEE

Dual Cassette
CLX-PFP000/SEE 520 Sheet Tray x 2
Feeder

HCF
CLX-HCF102/SEE
(High Capacity 2,000 Sheets (LTR, A4)
CLX-HCF102/XAA
Feeder)

Bridge Unit CLX-BRG200/SEE

Standard Finisher CLX-FIN40S/SEE 1,250 Stacking, Stapling (5 Pos)

Booklet Finisher CLX-FIN40L/SEE 3,250 Stacking, Stapling (5 Pos), Booklet

CLX-HPU000/XAA 2-3 Holes (NA)


Punch Kit
CLX-HPU001/SEE 2-4 Holes (EU)

Working Table CLX-WKT000/SEE

512MB Memory SCX-MEM300/SEE 512MB

FDI Kit CLX-KIT10F/SEE Serial Port

CLX-FAX160/SEE
CLX-FAX160/XEE
Fax Kit G3, T.37/38, PC Fax SW, Fax Manual Softcopy
CLX-FAX160/XEG
CLX-FAX160/XEU

CLX-FAX260/SEE
CLX-FAX260/XEE
Fax Multiline Kit G3
CLX-FAX260/XEG
CLX-FAX260/XEU

SmarThru Workflow Document Distribution Solution

CounThru2 Counter/cost Management Solution

Advanced Scan Kit CLX-KIT10D/SEE Searchable PDF, Barcode, etc.

110V, 10W (equipped by service person at field, voltage rating


Heating wire for CLX-DHK11C
of Heating Wire is the same as the machine’s voltage rating)
Cassette, HCF,
DCF 220V, 10W (equipped by service person at field, voltage rating
CLX-DHK12C
of Heating Wire is the same as the machine’s voltage rating)

Wireless LAN CLX-NWA20L

2-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Option unit configuration

Working Table
1,250-sheet standard finisher (CLX-WKT000)
(CLX-FIN40S)

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder


Bridge kit
(CLX-BRG200)

3,250-sheet booklet finisher


(CLX-FIN40L)

2/3 hole Punch kit


(CLX-HPU000)
2/4 hole Punch kit
(CLX-HPU001)
Main unit

Fax kit Fax multi-line kit Stand Optional tray High capacity feeder
(CLX-FAX150) (CLX-FAX250) (CLX-DSK10T) (CLX-PFP000) (CLX-HCF102)

FD I kit Expansion memory module 512M


(CLX-KIT10F) (SCX-MEM300)

Cassette Heating cable


(CLX-DHK11C/12C)

2-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Cosmos / Cosmos-R Option Unit Compatibility

CLX-9250/9350 CLX-9252/9352 SCX-8030/8040 SCX-8230/8240


Item Model
(Cosmos Color) (Cosmos-R Color) (Cosmos Mono) (Cosmos-R Mono)

Stand CLX-DSK10T O O O O
DCF CLX-PFP000 O O O O
HCF CLX-HCF102 O O O O
Bridge Unit CLX-BRG200 O O O O
1K Finisher CLX-FIN40S O O O O
3K Finisher CLX-FIN40L O O O O
CLX-HPU000 O O O O
Punch Kit
CLX-HPU001 O O O O
Staples Cartridge SCX-STP000 O O O O
Working Table CLX-WKT000 O O O O
Job seperator SCX-JST000 X X O O
FDI Kit CLX-KIT10F O O O O
CLX-FAX150 O X O X
Fax Kit
CLX-FAX160 X O X O
CLX-FAX250 O X O X
Fax Multi Kit
CLX-FAX260 X O X O

Heating Wire CLX-DHK11C O O O O


for HCF, DCF CLX-DHK12C O O O O

Heating Wire CLX-DHK11S O X O X


for Scan CLX-DHK12S O X O X

2-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.2 System configuration

Front view 1

1 DADF Cover 7 DCF (tray3, tray4)*


2 DADF width guides 8 Standard tray (tray1, tray2)
3 DADF input tray 9 Front door
4 DADF output tray 10 Front door handle
5 Standard tray right bottom door 11 Control panel
6 DCF right bottom door 12 Center tray

* Optional device

2-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Front view 2

1 Scanner glass 5 Power-switch


2 White sheet 6 Power receptacle
3 Multi-purpose tray 7 USB port (2 EA)
4 Multi-purpose tray width guide 8 Job separator*

* Optional device

2-10
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Rear view

1 DCF cable 5 USB host port


2 DADF cable 6 Finisher connector
3 Scanner locking screw 7 Network port
4 USB port (Connection port to computer)

2-11
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Inner view

1 Waste toner container 3 Imaging unit


2 Toner cartridge 4 Locking lever

NOTE
If you want to see the imaging unit, you need to remove the waste toner container. Lift the locking
lever upward. Then remove the waste toner container.

2-12
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

View with standard finisher (optional)

1 Standard finisher front door 5 Top tray


2 Manual stapler 6 Top door
3 Manual stapler button 7 Standard finisher Front door
handle
4 Finishing tray 8 Staple

2-13
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

View with booklet finisher1 (optional)

1 Booklet tray 5 Manual stapler button


2 Finishing tray 6 Top tray
3 Booklet finisher front door 7 Top door
4 Manual stapler 8 Booklet finisher front door handle

2-14
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

View with booklet finisher2 (optional)

1 Knife wheel 5 Staple


2 Booklet maker handle 6 Booklet Staple (2 EA)
3 Fold wheel 7 Booklet maker cover
4 Booklet jam removal wheel

Note
If you want to open the booklet maker, hold the booklet maker handle and pull it out.

2-15
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

16

Layout 15

14
1

13
4

5 12
11

7
10

1 DADF 7 1st tray 13 Fuser unit


2 Job separator output tray 8 2nd tray 14 Flatbed scanner
3 Face down output tray 9 Optional tray 15 Document output tray
(Stand / HCF / DCF)
4 Toner cartridges 10 Pick up rollers 16 Document input tray
5 Laser scanning unit 11 MP tray
6 Imaging units 12 Transfer roller unit

2-16
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Paper Path

The following diagram displays the path the paper follows during the printing process.

DADF
path

Finisher
path

Duplex
Simplex path
path

2-17
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.3 Sensor location


The following diagrams display the printer sensor locations.

S12 S13 S14 S15


S16

S18
S1
S17

S2

S3
S4
S9 S5

S8
S10 S6
S11
S7

Part Controller
Ref. Description Error Code
Number PCB
S2 PBA SENSOR ACR
S3 SWITCH FRONT COVER JC32-00012A S2-4210
S4 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M1-4111
PBA-MAIN
S5 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M1-4111
SCX-8230NA
S6 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 : JC92-02587B M1-4211
S7 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M1-4211
SCX-8240N
S8 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 : JC92-02587A M1-3122 / M2-3222
S9 SENSOR-PAPER SIZE JC32-00013A M1-4111
S10 SENSOR-PAPER SIZE JC32-00013A M1-4211
S11 SENSOR-HUMIDITY JC32-00005A A3-3311 / A3-3312

2-18
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Part
Ref. Description Controller PCB Relative Error Code
Number
PBA-COVER OPEN PBA-SCAN
S12 JC92-02143A M1-4211
SENSOR JOINT
S13 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 (JC92-02144A) A3-3311 / A3-3312
S14 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001370 SCAN PAPER SIZE
PBA-MAIN
S15 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001370 SCAN PAPER SIZE
S16 CCD 0605-001158 PBA-MAIN -
S17 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 -
S18 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001381 -

S21

S20

Part
Ref. Description Controller PCB Relative Error Code
Number
PBA-MAIN
S20 SENSOR-DEVELOPER JC32-00010A -
SCX-8230NA
: JC92-02587B

S21 SENSOR-CLN-SAW SCX-8240N -


: JC92-02587A

2-19
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

S33
S34

S31
S35 S36
S32
S37

S40
S38
S39
S44 S41
S42
S43
S46 S45
S49
S48
S47
S50
S53 S52
S51

Part
Ref. Description Controller PCB Relative Error Code
Number
S31 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M3-2230
M3-1211
S32 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M3-1213
M3-1214
PBA-MAIN
S33 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M3-2430
SCX-8230NA M3-1411
S34 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 : JC92-02587B M3-1413
M3-1414
SCX-8240N
: JC92-02587A M2-2411
S35 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001381 M2-2413
M2-2414
M2-1331
S36 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M2-1333
M2-1334

2-20
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Part Controller
Ref. Description Relative Error Code
Number PCB
M2-2111
S37 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M2-2113
M2-2114
M2-1324
S38 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M2-1325
M2-1321
S39 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 Curl Sensor 1
S40 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 Curl Sensor 2
S41 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 MP Long Size
M2-2213
S42 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M2-2215
M2-2216
M2-1213
S43 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001381 PBA-MAIN M2-1214
M2-1211
S44 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001399 SCX-8230NA OHP Sensor
: JC92-02587B
S45 VR-SLIDE 2102-001020 MP Size Sensor
S46 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 SCX-8240N M1-1610
: JC92-02587A M1-1113
M2-1124
S47 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001381
M2-1125
M2-1121
M1-1113
S48 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393
M1-5112
S49 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M1-4111
S50 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 S2-4A10
M1-1213
M2-1134
S51 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001381
M2-1135
M2-1131
M1-1213
S52 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393
M1-5212
S53 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER 0604-001393 M1-4211

2-21
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.4 Paper handling section


This section describes how the system picks up paper from the Paper tray or Multi-Purpose (MP) tray and
transports it to the transfer position. The paper feeding system mainly consists of the Pickup roller,
Forward roller, Retard roller, Transport roller, Registration roller, MP Paper sensor, Paper Empty
sensor, Tray Paper Stock sensor, MP Feed sensor, Tray Feed sensor, Registration sensor, and Drive
system for these components. The Transport motor is used to drive all of these rollers.

2.4.1 Overview
The following diagrams display the positions of the paper path rollers.

2ND EXIT
(OPTION)
EXIT

SIDE

MPF

TAKEAWAY

CASSETTE

DUPLEX

TR

REGI
PICKUP

2-22
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2ND Exit tray paper


full detection
2ND EXIT (OPTION) Return

2ND Exit tray jam detection

1st Exit tray paper


full detection
Duplex jam detection1
1st Exit tray jam detection
Return path solenoid
Exit

Paper jam detection


Duplex
Fuser

Paper curl detection

OPC
Duplex jam detection2

Regi Duplex clutch

Paper regi. time detection

MPF MPF
clutch

Tray1 paper remaining


quantity detection MPF solenoid
MPF media
Tray1 upper limit detection
MPF paper size detection
Tray1 paper
empty (Long media)
empty detection
detection
Paper tray Tray1 lift MPF media size detection
Tray1 paper motor Pick Up
size detection

Tray2 paper
empty detection
Tray2 lift
motor Tray2 transport detection
Tray2 paper
size detection Tray2 upper limit detection
Tray2 paper remaining
quantity detection

2-23
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Name Function Connector & pin information

Tray1 paper size detection Detects tray1 paper size (installation) CN16@ Cassette Joint PBA, 4Pin
Tray1 paper remaining quantity Detects tray1 paper remaining quantity CN11@ Cassette Joint PBA, 6Pin
detection
Tray1 paper empty detection Detects tray1 paper empty CN12@ Cassette Joint PBA, 3Pin

Tray1 upper limit detection Detects tray1 upper limit CN12@ Cassette Joint PBA, 3Pin

Tray1 transport detection Detects tray1 paper pass CN12@ Cassette Joint PBA, 3Pin
Tray1 Lift Motor Lifting knock up plate CN15@ Cassette Joint PBA, 3Pin
Tray2 paper size detection Detects tray1 paper size (installation) CN16@ Cassette Joint PBA, 4Pin
Tray2 paper remaining quantity Detects tray2 paper remaining quantity CN11@ Cassette Joint PBA, 6Pin
detection
Tray2 paper empty detection Detects tray2 paper empty CN13@ Cassette Joint PBA, 3Pin
Tray2 upper limit detection Detects tray2 upper limit CN13@ Cassette Joint PBA, 3Pin
Tray2 transport detection Detects tray2 paper pass CN13@ Cassette Joint PBA, 3Pin

Tray2 Lift Motor Lifting knock up plate CN15@ Cassette Joint PBA, 3Pin

Transparency detection Detects transparency CN10@ Engine PBA, 3Pin


Paper curl detection Detects paper position CN3@ SIDE JOINT PBA, 6Pin
Paper jam detection Detects fuser jam CN5 @ SIDE JOINT PBA, 3Pin

1st Exit tray jam detection Detects 1st exit tray jam CN7@ BOTTLE Joint PBA, 3Pin

1st Exit tray paper full detection Detect paper full CN7@ BOTTLE Joint PBA, 3Pin

2nd Exit tray jam detection Detects 2nd exit tray jam CN29 @ Engine PBA, 3Pin

2nd Exit tray paper full detection Detects paper full CN29 @ Engine, 3Pin

Return transport path detection Detects return(2nd exit tray) paper pass CN7@ BOTTLE Joint PBA, 3Pin

Return path solenoid Change paper path CN7@ Engine PBA, 2Pin

Duplex jam detection 2 Detects duplex jam 2 CN4 @ SIDE JOINT PBA, 3Pin
Duplex jam detection 1 Detects duplex jam 1 CN5 @ SIDE JOINT PBA, 3Pin
Duplex clutch Duplex driving control CN6 @ SIDE JOINT PBA, 2Pin
MPF solenoid MPF pick up roller up/down CN2 @ SIDE JOINT PBA, 2Pin

MPF clutch MPF driving control CN2 @ SIDE JOINT PBA, 2Pin
MPF media size detection Detects MPF paper size CN7 @ SIDE JOINT PBA, 3Pin
MP media size detection
Detects MPF paper size CN7 @ SIDE JOINT PBA, 3Pin
(Long media)
MPF Paper empty detection Detects MPF paper empty CN2 @ SIDE JOINT PBA, 3Pin

2-24
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.4.2 Components

The following diagrams display the positions of the printer components

1 Tray 1 Paper tray

2 Tray 2 Paper tray

3 Tray 3 Paper tray

4 Tray 4 Paper tray

27 5 Tray 1 pick up / retard /


25 forward rollers
24 6 Tray 2 pick up / retard /
forward rollers

26 7 Tray 3 pick up / retard /


23 forward rollers

22 20 8 Tray 4 pick up / retard /


21 forward rollers
19
9 MP Tray pick up / retard
/ forward rollers
18
17 10 Tray 1 feed roller
16 11 Tray 2 feed roller
15
12 Tray 3 feed roller
14
13 Tray 4 feed roller

14 Bypass feed roller


9
10 15 Sensor registration
5
16 Roller registration
1
11
17 Roller transfer
6
18 Sensor paper curl
2
12 19 Roller fuser
7 20 Sensor fuser out

3 13 21 Roller exit

8 22 Roller face down exit

4 23 Actuator face down bin


full
24 Sensor duplex return

25 Roller duplex return

26 Roller 2nd exit

27 Actuator 2nd Exit bin full

2-25
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.4.3 Functions

This section describes the functions of the paper handling components.

Pickup Roller (paper tray and MP tray)


This roller moves up and down and draws out the paper from the bypass tray or drawer and transports it to
the feed roller.

Forward Roller (paper tray and MP tray)


This roller is placed against the Retard roller. It transports the paper from the pickup roller to the
transport roller.

Retard roller (paper tray and MP tray)


This roller is placed against the feed roller. When two sheets of paper or more are transported from the
pickup roller, the load of the torque limiter of the Retard roller is heavier than the frictional force between the
sheets. As a result, the Retard roller is stopped and the lower paper does not advance any further. When
only one sheet is transported from the pickup roller, the Retard roller rotates following the feed
roller.

Transport Roller (paper tray and MP tray)


This roller transports the paper sent from the feed roller to the registration roller.

Registration Roller
Paper transported from the transport roller is pushed against the registration roller which aligns the leading
edge of the paper. Then, the registration rollers rotate to transport the paper to the transfer unit.

MP tray Paper Sensor


This sensor detects whether paper is set in the bypass tray. When it is, MP tray always comes
before drawer feeding.

Empty Sensor (Tray 1 / Tray 2)


This is a transmissive-type sensor and it detects the availability of paper in the drawer by using an actuator.
When there is no paper in the drawer, the actuator blocks the light path of the sensor, and the sensor
determines that there is no paper.

Paper Stock Sensor

This is a transmissive-type sensor which detects the amount of remaining paper in the drawer using an
actuator. When the remaining paper is consumed and approximately 100 sheets remain, the actuator
blocks
the light path for the transmissive-type sensor to detect that there is less paper.

Feed Sensor
This sensor detects if the leading edge or trailing edge of the paper has passed the feed roller. It also
detects jamming such as missfeeding.

Registration Sensor
This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the registration roller and that the
trailing edge of the paper has passed the registration roller.

2-26
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.4.4 Paper tray

The paper trays consist of the Main trays, Optional trays (DCF,HCF), and one Multi-Purpose (MP) tray.
The MP tray is located on the right side of the machine and allows feeding of specialty media stock,
envelopes, and custom size paper.
Paper size is set using the Size Guides in each tray. Adjust the Front, Rear, and End Guides to match the
paper size.

Specification
• Structure : Paper tray Type, Auto Paper Size
• Capacity : 520 Sheets ( 80g/㎡ standard Xerox Preminum)
• Paper :
-. Plain paper : A5, A4, A3, B5, B4, Letter, 11"×17"(Ledger), Statement, Legal
-. Special Paper : 12"×18", Label, Card stock
• Weight : plain paper 60 ~ 216 g/㎡
• Plate knock up Lift type : Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor

2-27
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.4.5 Pick up unit

When pickup takes place, the pickup roller moves down to come into contact with the surface of the paper.
The pickup roller moves down when the pickup solenoid is activated. The forward roller and the separation
roller serve to make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved to the paper path, and the paper is moved
as far as the registration roller by the work of the vertical path roller. The following is a diagram of the
pickup roller:

Forward Roller

Retard Roller

Actuator-Empty Sensor

Pick Up Roller

2-28
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.4.6 Registration unit

The registration roller is driven by the registration multi motor. The registration clutch (CL6) is located
between the registration roller and the registration multi motor, and it controls ON/OFF of the registration
roller in order to match paper and an image on the drum at the predetermined registration point.

SHAFT-REGI
ROLLER-REGI

JAM REMOVAL
LEVER

REGI SENSOR

Specification

• Skew in Simplex
-. Top Skew : 2.0mm/241.3mm ( Option : 2.5mm/241.3mm )
-. Side Skew : 1.5mm/180.5mm ( Option : 2.0mm/180.5mm )
• Skew in Duplex
-. Top Skew : 3.0mm/241.3mm ( Option : 3.5mm/241.3mm )
-. Side Skew : 2.3mm/180.5mm ( Option : 2.5mm/180.5mm )
• Dog Ear, Trees, Nicks, Wrinkling
-. Plain Paper : 1/5,000
-. Special Media : 1/1,000
• Margin
-. Top Margin : 4.23 ± 2 mm ( Tray3, 4, HCF : 4.23 ± 2.5 mm )
-. Left / Right Margin : 3 ± 2 mm ( Tray3, 4, HCF : 3 ± 2.5 mm )
-. Duplex Top Margin : 4.23 ± 2.5 mm ( Tray3, 4, HCF : 4.23 ± 3.0 mm )
-. Duplex Side Margin : 3 ± 2.5 mm ( Tray3, 4, HCF : 3 ± 3.0 mm )

2-29
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.4.7 MPF unit


The following is a diagram of the MFP unit:

MPF Clutch
MPF Pick up roller

Empty sensor
Long paper sensor

MPF
Tray

Specification
• Tray capacity : 100 sheets ( 80g/㎡ standard Xerox Preminum )
• Media Size : Max 12”×18” (305×457㎜) / Min 3.87”×5.82” (98×148㎜)
• Media weight : Plain paper 60 ~ 253 g/㎡
• Feeding speed : 40 ppm (SCX-8240NA), 30 ppm (SCX-8230NA) in Letter/A4 LEF (Long Edge Feeding)
• Auto size sensing : A6 SEF, Statement SEF, B5 SEF, A4 SEF, A5 LEF, B4 B5(JIS) LEF, 11x17,
LTR(Letter) LEF, A3, A4 LEF

Paper Separation

When the by-pass paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a by-pass printing job,
the by-pass solenoid [B] drops the pick-up roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack on the by-pass tray.
After that, the pick-up roller moves one
sheet of paper to the feed roller.

This machine uses an FRR (Feed and


Reverse Roller) system for feeding paper.

There is friction between the feed roller [E]


and Retard roller [D]. This friction separates
the top sheet of paper from the stack.

2-30
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.5 Image creation


This section describes the image creation process used by the printer.

2.5.1 Printing process overview

This mono printing system includes the LSU with a laser beams, a imaging unit and transfer unit.

This machine uses single Imaging unit and dual laser beams for mono printing. The Imaging unit consists of
Drum unit and Development unit. The Drum unit has an OPC drum, a scorotron (which charges the OPC),
a light-guide ( which transfers the LED’s light in the machine) and cleaning blade.

The OPC drum[A] is charged with a negative voltage by the scorotron and is exposed by the light from the
LSU (Laser Scanning unit)[B]. The light produced by a laser creates a latent image by discharging on the
surface of the OPC drum. The negatively charged toners are attracted to the latent image due to and
electric filed. The toners(real image) on the OPC drum are moved to the transfer media by the positive bias
applied to the transfer roller[c].

1. Charging the OPC drum: The scorotron gives the drum negative charges.

2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode irradiates the charged OPC through the lens and
mirrors .

3. Development: This machine uses a dual-component development system . The magnetic roller carries
negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum surface.

4. Transfer: The transfer rollers opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums to the transfer
media (e.g. paper, OHP film, etc).

5. Cleaning for OPC drum: The cleaning blade removes remaining toners on the drum surface after image
transfer to the paper.

6. Quenching for OPC drum: Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the LED
lamps at the end of every job.

2-31
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.5.2 Imaging unit

2.5.2.1 Imaging unit overview

The imaging unit consists of OPC drum unit and the development unit. The OPC drum unit has an OPC
drum, a scorotron which charges the OPC, a light-guide ( which transfers the LEDs light in the machine)
and cleaning blade. The development unit has a magnetic roller, two mixing augers, developer, a Dr-blade
and a TC (Toner Concentration) sensor.

The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.2 mm).

The developing gap between a drum and the corresponding magnetic roller cannot be adjusted because
they assembled as one Imaging unit in the factory.

The cleaning blade removes remaining toner on the drum surface after image transfer to the transfer belt.

The CRUM chip in the image unit stores the data about the Imaging unit.

Light guide

Cleaning blade
Scorotron
OPC Drum

Magnetic Roller

Mixing Auger

2-32
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.5.2.2 Drum drive

OPC and Mag Roller is driven by a motor. The OPC Drum and Mag roller are supplied with power from the
coupling.

Drive transmission gear


Drive motor BLDC

Coupling

Drum-K

BLDC motor

Gear-Drive OPC

Coupling OPC

Coupling Deve

2-33
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.5.2.3 Development

This machine uses a dual-component development system and has an imaging unit (which includes the
drum unit and development unit). A new unit contains 345g of toner. The developer in the unit is supplied to
the magnetic roller [A] by the two mixing augers [B] and is attracted onto the surface of the OPC drum. The
diameter of the magnetic roller is 18mm.

An imaging unit has a TC (Toner concentration) sensor[C]. The TC sensor [C] in the imaging unit is used
for controlling the operating range of toner density. The imaging unit is equipped with a CRUM in which
some information about the imaging unit is stored.

[A] Magnetic Roller

[B]
Mixing
Auger

[C] TC
Sensor [B] Mixing Auger

2-34
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Two mixing augers [A] circulate the developers (which are mixtures of carriers and toners) forward and
backward to agitate the developer in order to mix the carriers and toners well.

This occurs at the following times:

• During TC calibration
• During development.

Filters [B] on the top of the development unit ensure that the internal pressure does not become too high.
During the operating , this prevents contamination of the imaging unit by the toner.

[B] Filter

[A] Auger

2-35
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.6 Fuser unit

This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.

2.6.1 Fuser unit overview


An instant fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventional fusing and pressure
roller system.

The drum-fuser belt is made of 3 thin layers, so is heated quickly by halogen lamp inside.
Pressure roller is made of soft silicone rubber, which flattens slightly, increasing the fusing nip.
The drum-fuser belt contains two fusing lamps (one lamp, center heating lamp, heats the center and the
other lamp, side heating lamp, heats the ends in the axial direction).

NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors), located near the center and the rear end of the drum-fuser belt,
control the temperature of the drum-fuser belt at the center and the ends, respectively. Two NTC
thermistors and two thermostats, located at the center and the side, protect the fusing system from
overheating by the heating lamps.
Temperature is normally controlled by turning on and off the center heating lamp and side heating lamp,
respectively, corresponding to predetermined target temperatures.

Drum-Fuser Belt Thermistor


Center : 0.5mm-1.0mm distance
Side : Contact

Thermostat

NC Sensor
Pressure Roller

Halogen Lamp

2-36
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.6.2 Fuser unit components

The Fuser unit includes the following components:

1. Center heater lamp (LAMP1) / Side heater lamp (LAMP2)

These halogen lamps heat the drum-fuser belt. The center heater lamp (LAMP1) and the side heater
lamp (LAMP2) are lit alternately to heat the drum-fuser belt.
Each heater lamp has its coil in a different location. The coil of the center heater lamp (LAMP1) is in
the center, those of the side heater lamp (LAMP2) are on both sides. The heater lamps are fixed inside of
the drum-fuser belt so that they will not rotate separately.

2. Drum-fuser belt

It receives heat from halogen lamp inside and conducts heat to toner and paper. The thin fuser belt
reduces warming up time and mode changing time. To prevent the fuser belt from adhering to the toner,
the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. Rigid assembly located inside the fuser belt contacts inner
surface of the fuser belt at nip and is pressed on the pressure roller by springs in order to ensured proper
nip between fuser belt and pressure roller.

3. Pressure roller

The pressure roller is a rubber roller which ensures proper nip width between the pressure roller and
fuser belt. It is driven by external driving mechanism and drives fuser belt by pressure.

4. NC sensors

NC sensors detect the surface temperature of the center and the rear end of the fuser belt which controls
the heater lamps.

5. Thermostat

These thermostats cut off the power supply to the heater lamps by opening the circuit when the fuser belt
becomes abnormally hot as a result of problems such as a NC sensor malfunction.
These thermostats are used to prevent abnormal operation. When the thermostat is triggered, it must be
replaced (as well as the other damaged parts in the fuser unit).

2-37
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.6.3 Fuser unit drive

The fusing/paper exit motor [A] drives the pressure roller [B] through the gear train. The fuser belt [C] is
driven by pressure with the pressure roller [B].

Exit Motor [A]

Fuser Belt [C]

Pressure Roller [B]

2-38
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.6.4 Temperature control

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC sensors
detect the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises the temperature to the printing temperature.

Lamp 1(700W) : Center heating

NC Sensor2
NC Sensor1

Thermostat 1 Thermostat 2

Lamp 2(600W) :
Side heating

Overheat Protection

The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases:

• The fuser belt temperature detected by the NC sensors becomes higher than 198℃.

The following components are used if thermistor overheat protection fails.

• Two thermostats for the fuser belt get into line with the common ground line of the fusing lamp.

• If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 170°C, it opens and cuts power to the fusing
lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 170°C, it also opens and cuts power to the
fusing lamp.

2-39
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.7 Laser Scanning Unit

2.7.1 Laser Scanning Unit Overview

The Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) consisted of 1 polygon motor and 1 LD unit, forms a latent image on the
surface of 1 OPC drum. For this process, there are collimator lens, cylindrical lens and F-Theta Lens on
optical path. Also, LSU has the cover glass device to protect the LSU from the contamination. For interface
with set, LSU has the LD PBA on front side.

Scan direction

 Information
1
Part Code : JC97-04219A [LSU]

1 LD PBA

1 2 P/Mirror Motor

3 F1 Lens

4 F2 Lens

5 Cover glass
2 3 4 5

2-40
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.7.2 Laser Scanning Optical path

[A]

[B] [C] [D]

The laser beam is emitted directly from a polygon motor [A] to OPC [D]. F1 Lens [B] and F2 Lens [C]
determine the scanning line and image position. This is adjusted at the factory.
The LSU has 2 types depending on printing speed. The difference between the 2 models is shown below.

Mode SCX-8240 (40 ppm) SCX-8230 (30 ppm) Remarks


Laser Diode : Dual Beam Laser Diode : Dual Beam
LD Unit driving IC : for Dual LD driving IC : for Dual LD
PCB : 40/30 ppm common use PCB : 40/30 ppm common use
P/Motor
22,677 rpm 16,299 rpm
speed
Process
192 mm/sec 138 mm/sec
Speed
H/W Harness : 22 Pin Harness : 22 Pin
interface (Interface with set ) (Interface with set )

2-41
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.7.3 Laser synchronizing detectors

The machine has a beam detector sensor board (BD PBA). It is located on the corner (mark “A”)
The BD board detects the point of scanning start.

Main Scan Start Detection

A beam is detected by the BD PBA at the scanning start point and creates the horizontal sync signal
(Hsync).
The picture below shows the data scanning direction.

[A]

2-42
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.8 Printer Drive system

This section describes the printer drive system parts and process.

2.8.1 Drive Motors

The following diagram displays the locations of the printer drive motors.

6 5

4
3 9

The following table list the descriptions for the tagged drive locations.

Related
No. ITEM Type Qty Function
error
1 Duplex Return HB-STEP 1 Duplex return driving -
2 Fuser/Exit BLDC 1 Fuser/Exit driving -

2-43
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Related
No. ITEM Type Qty Function
error
HB-STEP 1 Pick-Up Roll driving -
3 Pick-Up
E-CLT 2 1st, 2nd Pick up -

4 Duct PM-STEP 1 Toner Duct driving -

Toner supply Toner transfer in Toner Bottle


5 DC 1 -
gear box driving Duct

BLDC 1 MP / Regi / Duplex driving -


MP / Regi /
Duplex
6 E-CLT 3 MP / Regi / Duplex control -

OPC / DEVE BLDC 1 OPC/DEVE -

7 PR Release PM-STEP 1 PR Release driving -

8 WTB PM-STEP 1 Waste Tank leveling -

9 CST Lift DC 2 1st , 2nd CST Lift -

2-44
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.8.2 Main drive unit (OPC, DEVE, MP, REGI, DUPLEX)

Front View

BLDC
(MP/REGI/DUP)
BLDC
(OPC/Dev)

Regi Control Clutch

Rear View

OPC Coupling

Deve (Auger)
Duplex Drive Gear
Coupling

REGI Drive Gear


MP Drive Gear

 Information
Part Code : JC93-00118A [DRIVE MAIN]

2-45
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.8.3 Pick-up Drive


The following is a diagram of the Pick-up drive:

Feed

Pick-up

Micro- Coupling
Clutch
Feed

Pick-up

 Information
Part Code : JC93-00065A [DRIVE-PICK UP]

Pick-up : Same H-Step motor is


Power Train
Rising 2 tray by e-clutch

H-Step Belt Pulley Gear Gear E-Clutch Pick-up 1 driving

Gear Feed 1 driving

Gear Gear Feed 2 driving

Gear E-Clutch Pick-up 2 driving

2-46
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.8.4 Fuser/Exit Drive


The following is a diagram of the drives that power the Fuser, Exit systems:

HB-Step

Duplex Return Drive

BLDC

Micro-Clutch

Exit Drive
Fuser Drive

 Information
Part Code : JC93-00119A [DRIVE-EXIT]

-Fuser/Exit : BLDC is interlocked.


Power Train
-Duplex Return : HB-Step is interlocked.

1. BLDC FUSER A/B Fuser Roll driving

EXIT RDCN EXIT IDLE A EXIT IDLE B EXIT RDCN C Exit Roll driving

2. H-Step DUP RDCN Duplex Return driving

2-47
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.8.5 Toner Duct drive


The following is a diagram of the Toner Duct drive:

GEAR DUCT RDCN

PM Step

Photo Interrupter

 Information
Part Code : JC93-00121A [DRIVE-DUCT]

Power Train PM Step motor : Toner Duct driving

Step (PM) GEAR DUCT RDCN Toner Duct Driving

2.8.6 Drive of Toner Supply


The following photo displays the location of the Toner Supply drive:

Bottle Coupling

 Information
Part Code : JC31-00124A
[MOTOR GEARED-T_SUPPLY]

2-48
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.8.7 WTB leveling drive


GEAR WTB RDCN

Worm (PM Step)

WTB Gear

 Information
Part Code : JC93-00067A
[DRIVE WTB]
GEAR WTB IDLE A

Power Train PM Step motor & Worm : WTB Leveling driving

Step (PM) Worm GEAR WTB RDCN GEAR WTB IDLE A WTB Leveling driving

2.8.8 PR Release drive

GEAR WORM WHEEL

Worm (PM Step)

GEAR ENCODER
GEAR PR RDCN

 Information
Part Code : JC93-00120A
[DRIVE RELEASE]

Power Train PM Step motor & Worm : PR Release Driving

Step (PM) GEAR WORM WHEEL GEAR PR RDCN GEAR ENCODER PR Release Driving

2-49
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.9 Scanner system


This section describes the printer scanner system parts and processes.

2.9.1 Scanner System Overview

During the scanning process, the surface of a document is exposed to FR module light.
The light reflected from the paper is led through mirrors, a lens, and a slit to a CCD where optical-to-
electrical conversion is performed, converting the optical image data into an electrical (analog) signal.
This analog signal is changed to a digital signal, which then undergoes various corrective processes
necessary for image formation. After that, arithmetic operations are performed on the digital signal, which is
then transmitted to the data writing processor.
In this machine, a reduction-type CCD for color processing is used. CCD is arranged in 3 lines and covered
with color filters (Red, Green, and Blue).

2-50
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.9.2 Scanning System Components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system:

1) DADF glass
The DADF glass is used when a document is read by the Automatic Document Feeder. The light from the
WLED is illuminated on the Document through this glass.
The document is transported on the DADF glass by the DADF operation.
Do not use such solvents, as alcohol when cleaning the surface of the DADF glass, as it is coated so as not
to be scratched by Document.

2) FR(Full Rate)-Module
FR-Module is consists of the White-LED , Light-Guide, mirror-1 etc.
It is driven by the scan motor (HB Step Motor) and moves across the document on the glass

• White-LED
This is a light source for scanning the document on the glass.
There are 4 White-LEDs. (Front 2 EA, Rear 2 EA)

• Light-Guide
This is to efficiently transfer the light creating White-LED to the surface of the document .
It made of the transparent Plastic Resin.

• Mirror-1
This mirror directs the light reflected from the Document to the mirror-2.

2-51
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

3) HR(Half Rate)-Module
HR-Module mainly consists of the mirror-2, mirror-3, etc. The reflected light on document is passed from
the mirror-1 through the mirrors-2 and -3 to the lens. HR module is driven by the same scan motor as that
of the FR module.
The speed and distance are half that of the FR module

4. Lens unit

The light reflected from the mirror-3 is led to the CCD placed at the focal point of the lens which is fixed
in a position.

4) Lens
The light reflected from the mirror-3 is focused to the CCD.

5) CCD board
Processes such as signal amplification, signal integration, and A/D conversion are applied on the lectrical
signal which was converted by the CCD.

6) Auto Paper Sensor


The size of an original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the Auto Paper Sensor fixed on the
Align-frame.

7) Pulley-Driving
The Steel Wire is coiled to this part and rotated by the scan motor. This also transfers the power to move
the FR/HR module.

2-52
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.10 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder(DADF) System


This section describes the DADF system parts and processes.

2.10.1 DADF System Overview


The following diagram and table include locations and descriptions of the DADF system.

R1 R2 R4
R5
R3

R6
R8 R9 R7 Simplex Path
Duplex Path

Symbol Part Name Function


Simplex & Duplex
R1 Aligns the leading edge of the paper for registration.
registration roller
Separates an original from the tray and transfers it to the
R2 Forward roller
paper path.
R3 Retard Pad Prevent the multi-feeding.
R4 Pick up roller Picks up an original from the tray.
R5 Original document tray Paper input tray.
R6 Exit tray Paper output tray
Sends an original to the exit tray and forms the duplex
R7 Exit roller
reverse path.
R8 Feed in roller Feeds an original before scanning.
R9 Feed out roller Transfers a scanned original to the exit roller.

2-53
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.10.2 Electric parts layout


The following diagram and table include locations and descriptions of the electrical components of the DADF.

S1
S3
S8
S5

S2
S4

S6
S9
S7
S10

Ref. Part Part Code Controller Board


PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
S1 0604-001415 PBA-ADF
(Cover)
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
S2 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
(Regi)
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
S3 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
(Detect)
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
S4 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
(Exit Idle)
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
S5 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
(Paper Length)
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
S6 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
(Paper Width)
PHOTO-INTERRUPTER
S7 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
(Exit)
S8 BLCD MOTOR 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
CLUTCH-ELECTRIC
S9 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
{ Pick Up}
CLUTCH-ELECTRIC
S10 0604-001393 PBA-ADF
(Regi)
S11 PBA-WIDTH SENSOR JC92-02167A PBA-ADF

2-54
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.10.3 DADF Drive System

Pick up clutch section

Regi clutch section

DADF motor drive section

DADF consists of one motor and two clutch to transfer the paper.

• A BLDC motor drives the system for simplex and duplex job.
• The Pick up and Regi clutch controls the driving on/off.
• The Cam type gear and solenoid is used for duplex reverse.

2-55
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.10.3.1 DADF Original Drive Assembly

CLUTCH-ELECTRIC DADF-GUIDE PICK UP ASS’Y

GEAR-PICKUP_IDLE SHAFT-PICKUP

After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system totally.

The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.

The CLUTCH can’t rotate inversely. The Spring that is included in DADF-GUIDE PICK UP ASS’Y is connected
to COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, it makes Stand-by status and fix the stopper operation.

The ADF roller and Pick up Roller is connected by the belt.

The ADF roller is provided with the power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the Registration
roller. When the pick up drive is stopped and Registration roller is driven, the ADF roller become idle.

The normal process is :

• When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated, and printing job starts, the motor and pick up
clutch work.
Then, the pick-up roller moves down and contacts an original in the tray.

• When the Registration sensor detects the paper, the pick up clutch stops.

• When the Detect-Sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the machine enters stand-by
status.

2-56
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.10.3.2 DADF Original Registration (Regi) Drive Assembly

ROLLER-IDEL TAKE AWAY

BELT-TIMMING GEAR

GEAR-KNOB

CLUTCH-ELECTRIC

ROLLER-REGI

GEAR-REDUCTION

The Regi drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the Registration Roller and transfer the paper to
ROLLER FEED.

The Registration Roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When original is placed in the Nip, the
roller is rotated for alignment.

The CLUTHC-ELETRIC repeats on/off to align each paper.

The GEAR-KNOB and GEAR-REDUCTION uses the BELT to provide the PULLEY connecting
ROLLER-EXIT with the power. This structure makes the user remove the jammed paper easily.

2-57
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.10.3.3 DADF Original Feed Drive Assembly

PULLEY-FEED
BELT-TIMMING GEAR

ROLLER-FEED

ROLLER-M_IDLE SCF

The ROLLER FEED is driven by the BELT-TIMMING that is connected to Motor.

The ROLLER-FEED and ROLLER-M IDLE SCF make the feeding force by using a spring pressure method.

The Motor transfers the paper through interlocking the Roller-Feed in and the Roller-Feed out. At scan, the
Motor is driven continually to maintain stable paper transfer.

2-58
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.10.3.4 DADF Exit Drive Assembly

GEAR-EXIT
ROLLER-EXIT

ROLLER-EXIT_IDLE

PULLEY-FEED

LINK-EXIT_IDLE

SHAFT-EXIT_IDLE

HOLDER-EXIT_IDLE F/R

The power from the Motor is transferred to GEAR-EXIT and ROLER-EXIT. The paper is transferred to the
exit. At duplex mode, counter rotation occurs.

To keep the pressure of the Exit Roller, the ROLLER-EXIT_IDLE is pressurized by spring. At duplex mode,
when it is rotated inversely, it make the space between rollers to protect the jam.

The space between rollers is adjusted by LINK-EXIT_IDLE and SENSOR-EXIT_IDLE.

2-59
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.10.3.5 Original Return Drive Assembly

SOLENOID-DADF
GEAR-CAM INNER

GEAR-EXIT

LINK-EXIT_IDLE

GEAR-CAM OUTER

The solenoid works at only duplex mode.

At Duplex Mode, when the motor rotates inversely, the solenoid is on and the GEAR-CAM OUTER and
GEAR-EXIT are driven.

When the GEAR-EXIT rotates, the solenoid drives the GEAR-CAM and it makes the space between the
Roller-Exit and Idle Roller.

2-60
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11 Hardware configuration


Diagram of the SCX-8230/8240 Series Electrical Circuit

Electric circuit system consists of Main-controller, DADF-controller, OPE-controller, USB HUB-


controller, HVPS, SMPS.

Main-controller is integrated with Engine-controller and Video-controller. Engine-controller


part controls mechanic system(LSU, HVPS, Fan, Fuser and ETC.) to print. Video-controller part
takes image data from Network, USB port, Scanner. It converts image data to printing language
and sends converting data to Engine-controller.
Main-controller applies Dual Core 1GHz CPU, 2GB Memory, 320GB HDD for superior
performance,. And it communicates with the OPE Controller through the USB HUB Controller and USB
IF to display system information on LCD panel.

USB HUB Controller interfaces with the Video Controller, the OPE Controller, and some USB Devices
such as USB memory sticks and Authentication devices such as Common Access Card readers.

OPE Controller displays the status of the system using WSVGA TFT LCD in response to user
actions or the Video controller.

DADF Controller controls some mechanisms required to scan by feeder continuously and communicates
with the Scan Controller to synchronize the scanning timing. The Scan Controller transfers
the scanning data to the Video Controller through the PCIe high speed bus.

MICOM at the Engine Controller activates each Controller’s power and turns off power according to an
optimized energy-saving algorithm for optimal efficiency. The soft Power Switch in the OPE Controller left-
side is used to safely shut down the system power. It is controlled by the MICOM.

2-61
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Circuit Board Locations

The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

C4N Main Board

HVPS

SMPS TYPE5
FDB

SMPS TYPE3

2-62
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.1 Main controller

Main-controller is a integrated board consists of Engine-controller and Video-controller.


It applies 1GHz Dual Core processor, 2GB DDR3 memory for superior performance. HDD disk is
connected with SATA and adopted USB controller to communicate with OPE-controller.

The engine control part manages the electronic photo system and sends the video data to LSU.
And it provides the high voltage, PWM, controls the temperature for fuser unit. It controls various optional
units like a DCF, HCF, Finisher.

[ Main Controller diagram ]

2-63
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Main Controller Printed Circuit Board Assembly

4
7

6
1

 Connection  Information
• SEC-CODE
SCX-8230NA : JC92-02587B
SCX-8240NA : JC92-02587A

• PBA Name : PBA-MAIN

2-64
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.1.1 MSOK

The MSOK PBA is used to store all system information. It is composed of a Non-Volatile Flash Memory,
two EEPROMs, and a secured EEPROM. The Flash Memory (8 MB size) and two EEPROMs (256K-bit
each) are used for all system operation information (system parameter, device status, tech information,
and service information). The secured EEPROM is for the system security information and is 2K-bit.
When a Video Controller PBA needs to be exchanged, the MSOK PBA should be re-installed to the new
Video Controller PBA to retain the system information.

2-65
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.1.2 Fax-Joint PBA

The Fax-Joint PBA is used for interfacing between the main controller, the modem PBA. The Interface
method of this PBA is UART type.

1 2 3

 Information
SEC-CODE : JC92-02584A
PBA Name : PBA-FAX JOINT

 Connection

1 MAIN PBA I/F CONNECTOR


2 Primary MODEM CARD I/F CONNECTOR
3 Secondary MODEM CARD I/F CONNECTOR

2-66
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.1.3 Primary Modem Card - Optional

There are two types of modem cards in the SCX-8230/8240. The Primary Modem Card is used to transfer
and receive FAX data through a telephone line. This PBA is controlled by the FCON PBA and has two
connectors, one for the telephone line connection and the other for an external phone connection.

3
1
2

 Information
FAX-Kit model name : CLX-FAX160
SEC-CODE : JC92-02558A
PBA Name : PBA-FAX CARD

 Connection

1 FAX JOINT I/F CONNECTOR

2 TEL LINE I/F CONNECTOR

3 EXTERNAL PHONE I/F CONNECTOR

2-67
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.1.4 Secondary Modem Card - Optional

The Secondary Modem card is used for FAX processing with FCON as the second FAX number. When
this card is installed, a customer can use another fax line. If the primary modem card is busy, then fax
data is processed using this card. The secondary modem card has only a Tel line connector, no external
phone connector.

1
2

 Information

FAX-Kit model name : CLX-FAX260


SEC-CODE : JC92-02599A
PBA Name : PBA-SECOND FAX CARD

 Connection
1 FAX JOINT I/F CONNECTOR

2 TEL LINE I/F CONNECTOR

2-68
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.1.5 Foreign Device Interface(FDI) – Optional

The FDI Module as a Option is used to track machine usage such as the number of print or copy pages for
some special users. The Module interfaces to the Video Controller.

 Information

SEC-CODE : JC92-01616A
PBA Name : PBA SUB-FDI

 Connection

1 CONNECTOR TO VIDEO CONTROLLER

2-69
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.2 OPE Controller

The Main OPE Controller is composed of an SOC (AM3715-1GHz processor), 128 MB DDR2 memory,
128 MB NAND-Flash Memory, and an 10.1 inch touch screen LCD (1024 x 600).
The AM3715 is used to interface with users through the LCD display, which can support the touch screen,
some Keys, and some LEDs. A received command is delivered to the Video Main Controller through the
USB interface of the HUB Controller PBA.

10.1” TFT COLOR


WSVGA 1024*600

Voltage Touch OPE


Shifter Controller CONTROLLER
I2 C
AM3715-1GHz
USB PHY
TUSB1210 USB LCD PMIC
PRCM
OTG Controller 32.768
OSC
USB GRAPHI Khz
Cortex-A8 26Mhz
HOST C
HUB 1GHz
USB HOST I2C ACCEL.
USB 32KB/32KB
PORT2 OpenGL KEY SUB
HUB UART L2 256KB OpenVG KEY
USB HOST LED
GL850G 24ea
mDDR GPMC *7-Bank
PORT1 MMC 5*5
Controller Controller
BUZZER
32-bit 16-bit
USB2.0

200MHz
mDDR NAND
128MB 128MB

MCB
USB Chorus4N
HUB USB
GL850 HOST
G

[ OPE Controller diagram ]

2-70
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

※ OPE of SCX-8230/8240 series has changed from 8.9 to 10.1 inches.

Note
Originally supplied 8.9 inch OPE was changed to 10.1 inch OPE.

If fault occurs for 8.9 inch OPE and if 8.9 Inch OPE service parts are not available,
replace it with 10.1 inch OPE Assy.

Firmware upgrade is not required for 8.1 inch to 10.1 inch OPE replacement.

OPE Assy Part Code Model

CLX-9252NA/SEE, CLX-9252NA/XAA, CLX-9252NA/XFA,


8.9 inch JC97-04238A CLX-9252NA/XSA, CLX-9352NA/SEE, CLX-9352NA/UEE,
CLX-9352NA/XAA, CLX-9352NA/XFA, CLX-9352NA/XSA,
SCX-8230NA/SEE, SCX-8230NA/XAA, SCX-8230NA/XFA,
SCX-8230NA/XSA, SCX-8240NA/CAS, SCX-8240NA/SEE,
10.1 inch JC97-04362A SCX-8240NA/UEE, SCX-8240NA/XAA, SCX-8240NA/XFA,
SCX-8240NA/XSA

8.9 inch JC97-04238C

CLX-9252NA/XEV, CLX-9352NA/XEV, SCX-8230NA/XEV,


SCX-8240NA/XEV

10.1 inch JC97-04362C

8.9 inch JC97-04238D

CLX-9252NA/XIL, CLX-9352NA/XIL, SCX-8230NA/XIL,


SCX-8240NA/XIL

10.1 inch JC97-04362D

8.9 inch JC97-04238E

CLX-9252NA/XAZ, CLX-9352NA/XAZ, SCX-8230NA/XAZ,


SCX-8240NA/XAZ

10.1 inch JC97-04362E

2-71
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.2.1 Sub Key PBA

Buzzer

 Connection

1 Interface Connector to OPE Main

2-72
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.2.2 USB HUB CONTROLLER PBA

1
3
5

4 6

 Information
Part Code: JC92-02586A
PBA Name : PBA-USB HUB

 Connection

1 Main Power Connector from Main PBA


2 OPE Main Power Connector to OPE Main PBA
3 USB Host Port for Interface Ext. Devices
4 USB Upstream Port to Main PBA
5 Cassette Indicating LED
6 WLAN Port

2-73
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.3 DADF Controller

ADF PBA controls the DADF driving. It uses RENESAS’s uPD70F3824(48MHz Main Clock, 256KB Flash
memory, 24KB RAM) and interfaces with MAIN PBA through UART communication. It has one Motor Driver
IC for motor driving and controls one BLDC motor, one solenoid, two clutch, ten sensors.

 Information
Part Code: JC92-02446B
PBA Name : PBA-ADF

 Connection

1 Scan Joint PBA


2 Exit Solenoid
3 Length Sensor 1,2,3 / Width Sensor 1,2
4 Exit Sensor
5 Exit Idle Sensor
6 BLDC Motor
7 Cover Open Sensor / Regi. Sensor / Detect Sensor
8 Pick up Clutch / Regi. Clutch / Scan Read Sensor

2-74
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.4 Interface Part

The CLX-82x0 series provides clear interface specifications of all components and modules in the system,
due to the design strategy for common-use and standardization. The main interface between the Main
Controller and the Engine Controller uses two pairs of drawer type board-to-board connectors, which
makes it possible to have a sliding connection to the Main Controller. The Main Controller and the IP
Controller use a PCIe interface to achieve high performance. In the connection of mechanical parts,
standard harnesses are used to reduce manufacturing costs and to allow convenient maintenance.

2.11.5 Connection Part

Controllers require connections to all of the system units such as the BLDC motor, Stepping Motor, Clutch,
Solenoid, Sensor, and other PBAs. The Engine Controller contains various types of connectors, to deliver
electronic signals through signal wires. The signal wires provide electronic control signals that are used for
starting and stopping the motors, operating clutches, activating solenoids, sensing the unit state, etc.

2-75
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.6 SMPS Board1

The SMPS (Switching Mode Power Supply) Board supplies electric power to the Main Board and other
boards through a Main Controller. The voltage provided includes +5V, and +24V from a 110V/220V power
input. It has safety protection modes for over current and overload.

 Specification  Information
General Input / Output Voltage 110V 220V
1) AC 110V (93.5V ~ 137V)
2) AC 220V (187V ~ 264V) Part Code JC44-00093C JC44-00100C
3) Input Current: 10A (110V) SMPS-V1 SMPS-V2
5A (220V) PBA Name
(SMPS board 1) (SMPS board 1)
4) Output Power: 275W
DC 5V : 35W
DC 24V : 240W  Connection
1 Input AC
2 Output 24V1/2/3/4
3 SMPS 24V Enable
4 Output 5V 1/2

2-76
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

◆ Input / Output connector

AC Input Connector( CN1 ) CONTROL SIGNAL Connector( CN2 )


PIN ASSIGN PIN NO Description PIN ASSIGN PIN NO Description
1 AC_L 1 GND
AC Input CONTROL
2 AC_N 2 24V ON/OFF
SIGNAL
3 GND

DC Output Connector( CN3 ) DC Output Connector( CN4 )


Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN
Power +24V1 1 Power +5V1 1

24V Ground GND 2 5V Ground GND 2


Power +24V2 3 Power +5V2 3

24V Ground +GND 4 5V Ground GND 4


Power +24V3 5

24V Ground GND 6


Power +24V4 7
24V Ground GND 8

2-77
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.7 SMPS Board2

The SMPS (Switching Mode Power Supply) Board supplies electric power to the Main Board and other
boards through a Main Controller. The voltage provided includes +5V, and +24V from a 110V/220V power
input. It has safety protection modes for over current and overload.

1
3

 Specification  Information
General Input/Output Voltage 110V 220V
1) AC 110V (90V ~ 135V)
2) AC 220V (180V ~ 270V) Part Code JC44-00097E JC44-00090E
3) Input Current: 10A (110V)
SMPS-V1 SMPS-V2
5A (220V) PBA Name
(SMPS board 2) (SMPS board 2)
4) Output Power: 111W
DC 5V : 15W
DC 24V : 96W  Connection
1 Input AC
2 N/A
3 Output 5V/24V1/24V2
4 Enable Signal

2-78
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

◆ Input / Output connector

AC Input Connector( CN1 )


PIN ASSIGN PIN NO Description
1 AC_L
AC Input
2 AC_N

DC Output Connector( CN3 )


Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN

Power 5V1 1
5V Ground GND 2
Power +24V1 3

24V Ground +GND 4


Power +24V2 5

CONTROL SIGNAL Connector( CN4 )

PIN ASSIGN PIN NO Description


1 GND
2 24V ON/OFF

3 N/A CONTROL SIGNAL


4 24VS SIGNAL
5 N/A

2-79
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.8 FDB Board

This board supplies 110V/220V to SMPS board and controls the fuser unit by using the fuser control signal
from main controller.

1 7

8
5 6

 Information
110V 220V
Part Code JC44-00226A JC44-00227A
PBA Name FDB V1 FDB V2

 Connection
1 Heater AC
2 Input AC
3 Input AC with Power Switch
4 Heater AC Output
5 AC Output for type5
6 AC Output for type3
7 Fuser AC
8 Control Signal

2-80
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.9 HVPS Board

HVPS board (High Voltage Power Supply) supplies High Voltage power for Charging (corona/grid), second
transfer (t2 roller), fuser bias, and saw plate.

CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4


( GRID ) ( Corona ) ( Deve AC ) ( Deve DC )

CN5
( HVPS I/F )
CN4
( Fan Ozone )

CN6
CN8
( Fuser
( Saw Plate )
Bias )
CN7
THV2(+) / (-)

 Specification
1) Input Voltage : DC 24V, 5V
2) Output Voltage :
-. CORONA : -700uA
-. GRID : -700V
-. DEV DC : -450V, AC : Vpp 900V
-. THV(T2)+ : 40uA, THV(T2)- : -1300V
-. SAW : -1000V

 Information
Part Code: JC44-00182A
PBA Name : HVPS MONO

2-81
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

 Connection

Description PIN NAME ASSIGN


Output Voltage CORONA CN2
Output Voltage DEVE AC CN3
Output Voltage DEVE DC CN4
Output Voltage TRANSFER CN7
Output Voltage SAW PLATE CN8

CN1
Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN
Output Voltage GRID 1,2

CN4
Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN
Output signal OUT_FAN OZONE 1
Signal nDETECT_FAN_OZONE 2
GND DGND 3

CN6
Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN
Output Voltage FUSER BIAS 1,2

CN5
Description PIN NAME PIN ASSIGN
PWM signal PWM_AC_VPP 1
PWM signal PWM_MHV_GRID 2
PWM signal PWM_MHV_CORONA 3
Input Voltage +5V 4
Input Voltage +24V4 5
Input Voltage +24V2 6,7
GND DGND 8,9,10,11
Signal LEAK_SENS 12
PWM signal PWM_FAN_OZONE 13
Signal nDETECT_FAN_OZONE 14
Output Voltage READ_THV 15
PWM signal PWM_FUSER_BIAS 16
PWM signal PWM_SAW 17
nEN signal nEN_THV(-) 18
PWM signal PWM_THV 19
nEN signal nEN_AC 20
PWM signal PWM_DEVE_DC 21
PWM signal PWM_AC 22

2-82
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.10 Eraser PBA

Eraser PBA is comprised of 18 LED components. Each LED is used for erasing negative charges
on the surface of the drum after printing.

1- BLACK : GND
2- GRAY : 24V

 Information
Part Code: JC92-02244A
PBA Name : PBA-ERASER

2.11.11 Side Joint PBA


This is the interface PBA between the side unit and the main controller. The Side Joint PBA provides a
connection interface for clutches, solenoid, T2 engage motor.

1 2 3

4 5 6 7

 Connection  Information

1 Side Joint I/F SEC-CODE : JC92-02233A


PBA Name : PBA-SIDE JOINT
2 Duplex 2. ID Sensor
3 Duplex, Fuser Output Sensor
4 Duplex Clutch
5 MP Media Size
6 MP Sensor, Clutch
7 Paper Curl Sensor

2-83
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.12 Waste Sensor PBA

The Waste Sensor PBA detects the waste toner level inside
the waste toner container.

 Information
Part Code: JC92-02471A
PBA Name : PBA-WASTE SENSOR RX

2.11.13 LED Panel PBA

The LED Panel PBA includes 2 Red Color LED components for indicating the Paper tray unit status
(paper empty, paper low, and paper lifting).

 Information

Part Code: JC92-02158A


PBA Name : PBA-LED PANEL

2-84
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.13 Deve Crum Joint PBA


The Deve Crum Joint PBA is the interface PBA between the Developer Unit and the system.

 Information
Part Code: JC92-02163A
PBA Name : PBA-DEVE CRUM JOINT

2.11.14 Toner Crum Joint PBA

The Deve Crum Joint PBA is the interface PBA between the Developer Unit and the system.

 Information
Part Code: JC92-02164A
PBA Name : PBA-TONER CRUM JOINT

2-85
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.15 Scan Joint PBA

The Scan Joint PBA includes 1 Bipolar Step Motor Drive IC (for the scan motor) and interfaces with WLED,
APS sensor, Cover Open Sensor, Home position sensor and main board. It also provides connector s for
the ADF I/F and the 24V, 5V power.

3 1

4 5

2
6

 Information
SEC-CODE : JC92-02579A
PBA Name : PBA-SCAN JOINT

 Connection

1 Main PBA

2 ADF PBA

3 WLED CTL PBA

4 APS Sensor 1.2

5 Cover open Sensor PBA, Home position Sensor

6 Scan Motor

2-86
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.11.16 White-LED(WLED) CTL PBA

The WLED CTL PBA has the LED DRIVER IC for WLED light drive.

 Information
SEC-CODE : JC92-02459A
PBA Name : PBA-WLED CTL

 Connection

1 SCAN JOINT PBA


2 WLED AL Front
3 WLED AL Front

2.11.17 White-LED(WLED) AL FRONT PBA

The WLED AL FRONT consists of two WLED used as scanner light. The scanner unit has two WLED AL
FRONT PBAs.

 Information

SEC-CODE : JC92-02460A
PBA Name : PBA-WLED AL Front

 Connection

1 WLED CTL PBA

2-87
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.12 Cassette Heating Cable


Cassette Heating cable is installed in bottom of the cassette. In very hot and humidity environment, this
unit can heat papers and inner space of cassette to improve the quality of print process and printout.

 Information
Option Code

CLX-DHK11C(110V)
CLX-DHK12C(220V)

2-88
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2.13 Wireless LAN option

This option will enable wireless printing without the additional wireless AP.

Support Model

- CLX-9301/9251/9201 series
- SCX-8128/8123 series
- CLX-9352/9252 series
- SCX-8240/8230 series
- CLX-8650/8640 series

Sales Target Subsidiaries

Region 1st Target 2nd Target

SENA
SEBN
SEG
SEPOL
SEI
EU SEAG
SEUK
SEP (TBD)
SEF
SESA (TBD)
SESG (TBD)

North America SEA SECA


Asia Korea -

Specification

Item Description

2.4 GHz Single Band


Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n compliant

WEP, WPA-PSK, WMM, WMM-PS, TKIP, and AES hardware


Security
acceleration

WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) compatible


Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Direct™ compatible

NFC NFC (Passive type)


Host Interface USB 2.0
Dimension 205.0*145.0*55.0 mm
Weight 0.16Kg

2-89
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Components

JC63–04415A [COVER-WLAN]
JC63–04416A [COVER-WLAN LOWER]
1 Wireless Kit
JC92–02308A [PBA-WNPC]
JC39–02052A [HARNESS-WLAN]
2 USB Extension Cable JC39–02053A [HARNESS-WLAN EXTENSION]
Internal Harness for CLX-
3 JC39–01192A [HARNESS-WIRELESS LAN]
9x52/82x0
4 NFC Tag JC68–03012A [LABEL ETC-NFC TECTILE STICKER]
5 NFC Guide Sticker JC68–03048A [LABEL VER-INFORMATION]

Note - For installing this option, refer to QIG(Quick Installation Guide).

2-90
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

NFC Tag Write

- Summary

1. PIN code
- Check the current PIN code of printer using print report(Network setting).
- Printer : “Setup” -> “Reports” -> “Print”
- “Wi-Fi Direct Information” > *“WPS-PIN for NFC”

2. NFC Setting
- NFC option of mobile phone should be turned on before using tag writer

Android 4.1 : Settings -> WIRELESS & NETWORKS More… -> NFC checkbox
Android 4.0 : Settings -> WIRELESS & NETWORK NFC On

3. NFC Tag Writing App (This application will be issued via service bulletin by HQ CS)

Run NFC Writer

Install “SamsungMobilePrintNFCWriter” APK file

Please turn on the WiFi before checking


WPS-PIN for NFC value

2-91
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

- Search for Wi-Fi Direct printers


- Select target printer.

Note) Wi-Fi Direct should be turned on in both printer and mobile


phone.

- Model information : Model Name, MAC Address, AAR


- Need to insert PIN code if target model supports WFD PIN
connection. (NFC model)

2-92
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

Tagging

Touch Mobile
phone to NFC Tag

Touch mobile phone to NFC tag, and then it will show “Tag written successfully” message,

Note) if there occurs an error while writing NFC tag, try to touch NFC tag again.

2-93
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
2. Product Description

2-94
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 R
3. Replacement
l t proce
edure
d

3.1 General precautions on disassembly

When you disassemble and reassemble components, you must use extreme caution. The close proximity
st. If components are removed, any cables disturbed
of cables to moving parts makes proper routing a mus
by the procedure must be restored as close as possible to their original positions. Before removing any
hat will be affected.
component from the machine, note the cable routing th

Whenever servicing the machine, you mus


st perform the following:

1. Check to verify that documents are not stored in me


emory.
2. Be sure to remove the toner cartridge before you dis
sassemble parts.
3. Unplug the power cord.
4. Use a flat and clean surface.
5. Replace only with authorized components.
6. Do not force plastic-material components.
on.
7. Make sure all components are in their proper positio

3-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.2 Cover
This section describes the procedures for removing an
nd replacing the printer covers.

3.2.1 Front cover


P f
Perform th
the ffollowing
ll i procedure
d tto remove th
the ffrontt co
over:

1. Open the front cover [A].

[A]

2. Remove 2 screws [B] and 2 pins [C].

[B]

[C]

3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.2.2 Left cover

Perform the following procedure to remove the Left Co


over.

1. Remove Plate-Shield [A] after removing 1 screw. 4. Remove the left lower cover [D] after removing
2. Remove the ozone filter [B]. 4 screws.
3 Remove the left upper cover [C] after removing 4
3.
screws.

[A]

[[C]]
[D]
[B]

3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.2.3 Rear cover

1. Remove the rear upper cover [A] after removing 2. Remove the rear lower cover [B] after
7 screws. removing 5 screws

[B]

[A]

3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.2.4 Right cover

1. Remove the right lower cover [A] after removing 2. Remove 2 screws.
2 screws. 3. Remove the right cover [B] after opening the
side door.

[B]

[A]

3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.3 OPE unit


This section contains the procedures for disassembling
g the components of the printer OPE Unit.

3.3.1 OPE assembly

1. Open the side cover. 3. Remove the screw cover and 3 screws.

2. To remove the USB cover, remove 1 screw. 4. Release the USB cover.

3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

5. Unplug the connector. 6. Pull out the connector from the holder hole.
7. Take off the OPE assembly.

3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.3.2 OPE PBA and LCD panel

Perform the following procedure to remove the OPE PBA and LCD panel from the OPE assembly.

1. Remove the Rail cover after removing 1 screw. 3. Remove 2 screws, and shift the cover-rail [B] in
the direction of the arrow.

[B]

[A]

2. Remove 4 screws, and then shift the cover-rail [B] 4. Remove 2 screws.
in the direction of the arrow.

[B]

3-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

5. Take off the cover-rail [B]. 7. Remove the OPE main PBA after removing 6
screws and 4 cables.

[B]

CAUTION
Be careful not damage in FFC cable.

6. Remove the bracket-rear [C] after removing 8. Remove the bracket-LCD [D] after removing 6
5 screws. screws.

[D]
[C]

3-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

9. Take off the LCD panel assembly [E]. 10. Remove the Key-PBA [F] after removing 2 screws.

[F]

[E]

10
3-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.3.3 Key buttons

1. Remove the rubber-key [A]. 2. Remove the key buttons.

[A]

11
3-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.4 Scan unit

This section contains the procedures for disassembling


g the components of the printer Scan Unit.

NOTE
Perform the followings after replacing specified scanner part.
Before replacing any parts, turn off the machine.

• Scanner Geometry Compensation


• Evaluate copy quality

Scanner Geometry Compensation


Refer to Scan Area Adjustment in chapter 4. Service Mo
ode.

Evaluate copy quality after replacing the specified scanner part

NOTE
s
Specified Scanner Part : Scan Main PBA , Scan Glass

    

P
Pass Criteria
( ,
1) 4mm Line should be printed at least in (,  )

2 Difference of Edge line value of (, ) should not


2)
be over 2.6mm

Evaluation Chart : Samsung Test Chart A3


(JC81-08430A)

12
3-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.4.1 Scanner Assembly

1. Remove the DADF connector after removing 1 4. Open the side cover. Remove 2 screws. And
screw. remove the scan right cover.
2. Remove 1 screw. Unplug 1 connector.

5. Remove the scan left cover after removing 3


3. Lift up and release the DADF Unit. screws.

3-13
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

6. Remove the scan front cover after removing 8. Remove 3 screw cover stickers. Remove 5
2 screws. screws. And remove the scan rear cover.

7. Remove the rear cover after removing 7 screws. 9. Remove the main board shield cover after
removing 6 screws.

14
3-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

10. Unplug 2 scan cables from the main board. 12. Remove 2 screws from the right of the
scanner.

11. Remove 5 screws from the left of the scanner. 13. Lift up and release the scanner assy.

15
3-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.4.2 Scan Glass

1. Remove 2 screw stickers and 2 screws. 3. Remove 2 screw stickers and 2 screws.
Remove the glass scan ADF[A]. Remove the scan glass [C]

[A]

[C]

2. Remove 2 screw stickers and 2 screws.


Remove the Cover scan glass [C].

[B]

3-16
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

343L
3.4.3 Lamp A
Assembly
bl

1. Remove the scan glass. (Refer to 3.4.2) 4. Make the marker with pen for indicator.
2. Detach the black tape.
Note – When reassembling the lamp assembly,
place it on marker again
again.

3. Move the scan lamp assembly to the middle


as shown below
below.

5. Remove 2 screws.

17
3-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

6. Remove the lamp assembly. 7. Unplug the flat cable. Remove 2 screws. And
release the scan lamp assembly.

18
3-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

344S
3.4.4 Scanner B
Board
d

3. Unplug all cables. Remove 3 screws. And


1. Remove the DADF Unit.
remove the scanner board.
2. Remove 3 screw stickers and 5 screws.

19
3-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

345S
3.4.5 Scanner paper sensor

1. Remove the scan glass. (Refer to 3.4.2.) 4. Remove 2 screws. Unplug the connector. And
2. Remove the align cover after removing 4 screws. remove the scanner paper sensor.

3. Turn up the sensor holder after removing 1


screw.

20
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 5 Fuser
3.5 F unit
i

g the components of the printer Fuser Unit.


This section contains the procedures for disassembling
Perform the following procedure to remove the Align se
et from the Scan Unit.

Caution
The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fuser unit. When replacing it, you may get burned. Before
replacing it, make sure that fuser unit has cooled..

1. Open Side-cover.

2. Remove 4 screws from the left/right.

3. Remove the fuser unit by holding the


handles [A].

21
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.5.1 Fuser cover

1. After removing 4 screws, disassemble 5. After removing the outer E-ring, disassemble
the bracket. a gear. And remove the inner E-ring.

2. Remove the 2 receptacles connecting


Thermostat.

3. After removing 2 screws, disassemble 6. After removing 4 screws, take off the
the Thermostat. cover.

4. Pushing
g the hook to outward,, remove 7. In a same way,
y after removing
g 3 screws,
the 2 Thermisters. take off the cover.

22
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.5.2 Draw connector

8. Pull out the harness to the indicator 12. Remove 2 screws. Pushing the hooks by
direction. After removing 3 screws, take off sharp pinses, remove the harnesses
the bracket.

CAUTION
9. After removing 2 screws, take off the gear When reassembling the pin connector, make sure
assembly.y the colors are positioned as shown the left mark.

10 Open
10. O the
h cover and
d remove the
h bbracket.
k 13. Pull out the harnesses to the direction of
arrow.

23
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.5.3 Halogen lamp

13. Remove the 2 screws. Take off the lamp 16. After removing 2 screws, take off the
holder. bracket.

14. In the same way, remove the other side 17. After removing 4 screws, take off the bracket.
lamp holder.

15. After flattening the harness, pull out the 18. After removing 2 screws, take off the
lamp carefully. bracket.

Caution
Becareful not to damage Lamp and Heat-
roller.

24
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.5.4 Heat roller

20. In the same way, remove the bracket. 23. Remove the thermistor bracket.

21. By tweesers or hook, remove the springs 24. Remove the heat-roller carefully.
at both side of Fuser.

Caution
22. After removing E-rings, take off the Be careful not to damage the rollers.
pressure lever.

25
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.5.5 Pressure roller

25. Remove the R-ring by tweeser. Take off


the fuser gear.

26. Remove the brackets at both side of Fuser.

27. Remove the pressure roller. 거합니다.

Caution
Be careful not to damage the surface of
roller.

26
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.6 Side Unit


This section contains the procedures for disassembling
g the side unit of the printer.

1. Open the side door.

2. Remove 4 screws from both sides.


3. Remove the Side unit.

CAUTION
When removing 4 screws. hold the side unit not
to drop itit.

27
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.6.1 Duplex sensors

1. Remove 2 screws. Release 2 hooks.

Hook
Hook

2. Turn the Side-Duplex Entrance up. Release the defe


ective sensor after removing 1 screw.

Sensor

Sensor

28
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.6.2 Transfer sensors


1. Release the transfer roller assy.

2. Remove 3 screws.

3. Lift up the Cover-Guide


Cover Guide Feed.
4. Remove a sensor from the Cover-Guide Feed.

Sensor

29
3-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

5. Remove the Guide-TR Upper after removing 6


screws.

6. Remove the shaft after unhooking both


holders.

Hook Hook

7. There are 3 sensors. Remove it after


unplugging the connector.

30
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.6.3 MP unit

1. Open the MP tray. Remove 1 screw.

2. Remove 2 screws.

3. Remove the connector-cover [A] after


removing 3 screws.

[A]

31
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

4. Unplug 2 connectors and remove 1 screw.

5. Remove the MP tray.

32
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.6.3.1 MP Solenoid

1. Remove the Cover-Top MP [A] after removing


2 screws.

[A]

2. Release the linker.

3. Remove 2 screws.

33
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

4. Remove the Link-Solenoid [B].


[B]
5. Remove the Clutch [C] after removing the
E-ring.
[C]

6. Remove 3 E-rings [D] and 3 Bushes [E].

[E]
[D]

7. Remove the E-ring [D] and Bush[E].

[E]
[D]

34
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

8. Remove the MP-Bracket Pick Up [F].

[F]

9. Remove the MP Solenoid [G] after removing


[G] 2 screws.

35
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.7 Electrical components


This section contains the procedures for disassembling
g the electrical components of the printer.

3.7.1 Main board

1. After removing 7 screws, take off the Rear 3. Remove the FAX board holder.
upper cover.

[A]
CAUTION
Observe precautions
For handling
Electrostatic
Sensitive
Devices

2. After removing 6 screws, Take off the main 4. Open the harness-clamps.
board cover.

CAUTION
Observe precautions
For handling
Electrostatic
Sensitive
Devices

36
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3. Take off all connectors on the main board. Rem


move 6 screws,

CAUTION
Observe precautions
For handling
Electrostatic
Sensitive
Devices
MSOK

Caution
When changing the main
board, you must install the
previous MSOK and memory.

37
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.7.2 Storage (HDD)


( )

1. After removing 7 screws, Take off the rear 3. Remove the FAX board holder.
upper cover.

[A]
CAUTION
Observe precautions
For handling
Electrostatic
Sensitive
Devices

2. After removing 6 screws, take off the main 4. Open the harness clamp. After emoving 4
board cover. screw, take off HDD.

CAUTION CAUTION
Observe precautions Observe precautions
For handling For handling
Electrostatic Electrostatic
Sensitive Sensitive
Devices Devices

38
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 7 3 Toner
3.7.3 T PBA Toner
PBA, T motor
1. Remove Rear-cover.

2. After removing 5 screws, take off the


Mainboard Shield.

3. After removing 5 screws, pull out a 5. After pulling out a connector, remove a
connector. screw.
4. Take off Toner motor. 6. Remove Toner PBA.

39
3-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 7 4 Lift motor
3.7.4 t

1. Remove all connectors on Lift motors.

2. After removing 3 screws, take off the Lift motor.

40
3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 7 5 FDB
3.7.5

1. After removing 7 screws, take off the rear 3. After removing 6 screws, take off the
upper cover. SMPS shield.

[A]

2. After removing 5 screws, take off the 4. Take off all connector on the FDB. Remove
rear lower cover. 를 분리합니다. 4 screws, put out the FDB.

[B]

41
3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.7.6 HVPS

1. After removing 5 screws, take off the rear 3. Take off all connectors on HVPS. After
lowe cover. 제거합니다. removing 4 screws, put out the HVPS.

[A]

2. Remove 5 screw. Take off the HVPS cover.


CAUTION
Observe precautions
For handling
Electrostatic
Sensitive
Devices

42
3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 7 7 SMPS
3.7.7

Note – This product has 2 SMPS Board. 3. After removing 6 screws, take off SMPS
shield.

1. After removing 7 screws, take off the rear


upper cover.

[A]

4. Pull out all connectors on SMPS 1,. After


removing 4 screws, take off SMPS 1.

2. After removing 5 screws, take off the


rear lower cover.

[B]

.5 Pull out all connectors on SMPS 2,. After


removing 4 screws, take off SMPS 2.

43
3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.7.8 SMPS Fan

Perform the following procedure to remove the SMPS Fan from the printer.

1. Remove Rear cover.


2. After
2 Aft removing
i 6 screws, ttake
k off
ff SMPS
Shield.

3. Pull out a connector on SMPS.


4. After removing a screws, take off the SMPS
fan.

Caution
Not to change the assembly direction of fan.

44
3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.7.9 Ozone filter Fan

1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Remove the Ozone filter [A].

3 R
3. Remove th
the 4 screws.

[A]

4. Release the harness from the holder and Unplug the


e connector.

5. Remove the Ozone Filter Fan.

45
3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.7.10 Side joint PBA


Perform the following procedure to remove the Side joint PBA from the printer.

1. Open the side unit. 3. Unplug all connectors.


4. Remove 4 screws.
5. Release the side jjoint board.

CAUTION
2. Release the side joint board cover after removing When you reassemble the side joint board to the
2 screws. side unit, make sure the harness arrangement is
correct.

Push !

The harness on the side joint board.

The harness of Face up Sensor.

46
3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.7.11 Eraser lamp

To remove the eraser lamp. first, remove the toner cartridge, imaging unit and inner cover. Refer to
the step 1~12 of the 3.14 LSU disassembly.

1. Remove 1 screw.

2. Unplug the connector and remove the eraser lamp.

3-4
47
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.7.12 Waste sensor PBA

To remove the waste sensor PBA. first, remove the ton


ner cartridge, imaging unit and inner cover.
Refer to the step 1~12 of the 3.14 LSU disassembly.

Remove the waste sensor PBA after removing 1 screw


w and connector.
connector

48
3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.7.13 Temperature sensor

3.7.13.1 Outer Temperature sensor

1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to 3.2.2 Left cover.)


2. Remove the outer temperature sensor after removin ng 1 screw and connector.

3.7.13.2 Inner Temperature sensor

1. Open the Cover-Side and remove the fuser unit. (Re


efer to 3.5 Fuser unit)
2. Remove the sensor cover after removing 3 screw.
3. Unplug the connector and release the temperature sensor.
s

49
3-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.8 Main drive unit


To disassemble the Main drive unit, remove the Rear cover
c and right cover first.
(Refer to 3.2.3 and 3.2.4)

1. Remove 5 screws.
2. Remove the Main drive unit.

50
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.8.1 Main drive motor


There are 2 identical motors in the main drive unit.
To remove a motor, remove 4 screws and 1 connector.

CAUTION
Be careful not to change the two connectors.
The arrows indicate the proper connector for each
motor (Grey/Black for right side motor, Grey/Blue
for left side motor)

3.8.2 Main drive clutch


1. Remove the bracket after removing 2 screws and 2. Remove the clutch after unplugging the connector
the Fixer. and E-ring.

Fixer

51
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.9 Exit drive unit

This section contains the procedures for disassemblingg the Exit Drive Unit components of the printer.
To remove the Exit Drive Unit, perform the following procedure.

1. Remove Fuser out fan and Duplex fan after removing 3 screws.

3. Remove exit drive unit after removing 3 screws and all of the connectors.

52
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.9.1 Exit drive motor

1. Remove the Exit drive unit. (refer to 3.9)


ector.
2. To remove the motor, remove 4 screws and 1 conne

53
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.10 Toner Duct Drive unit


Perform the following procedure to remove the Toner Duct
D Drive unit from the printer.

1. Remove the Toner duct drive after removing 2


screws.

54
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.11 PR Release Drive unit


Perform the following procedure to remove the PR Rele
ease Drive Unit.

1. Remove the Main Drive unit and Exit Drive unit. (Refe
er to 3.8~3.9.1)
2. Remove the PR Release Drive unit after removing 3 screws
s and 1 connector.

55
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.12 Pick-up drive unit

This section contains the procedures for disassembling the Pick-up Drive Unit components of the printer.
Perform the following procedure to remove the Pick-upp Drive Unit.

1. Remove the SMPS box.


2. After removing 1 screws, disassemble the cover casssette rail.

3. Remove Pickup Drive Unit after removing 4 screws and all connectors

56
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.13 WTB leveling drive unit

1. Open the front cover.


2. Remove the waste toner container [A].

[A]

3. Open the side door.


4. Remove the toner cartridge [B] and the imaging
unit [C].
[C]

[B] CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging
[C] unit.

To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit


to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a
piece of paper to protect it if necessary.

5. Remove 2 screws and 2 pins [H]


5 [H].
6. Remove the front cover.

[H]

57
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

7. Remove the OPE hinge cover [D] after removing


1 screw.

[D]

8. Remove 8 screws.
9. Remove the tray1 cassette.
10. Remove the inner cover by pushing 2 hooks.

11. Open the harness holder.

CAUTION
When reassembling the inner cover, do not forget
to place the harness in its holder.

58
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

12. Unplug the connector.

CAUTION
When reassembling the inner cover, do not forget
to plug the connector.

13. Remove the WTB leveling drive unit after


removing 4 screws.

59
3-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.14 LSU (Laser Scanning Unit)

1. Open the front cover.


2. Remove the waste toner container [A].

[A]

3. Open the side door.


4. Remove the toner cartridge [B] and the imaging
unit [C].
[C]

[B] CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging
[C] unit.

To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit


to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a
piece of paper to protect it if necessary.

5. Remove 2 screws and 2 pins [H]


5 [H].
6. Remove the front cover.

[H]

60
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

7. Remove the OPE hinge cover [D] after removing


1 screw.

[D]

8. Remove 10 screws and unplug the connectors.

CAUTION
When reassembling the OPE cover, do not forget to
plug
l ththe connectors.
t

9. Remove the tray1 cassette.


10. Remove the inner cover by pushing 2 hooks.

11. Open the harness holder.

CAUTION
When reassembling the inner cover, do not forget
to place the harness in its holder.

61
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

12. Unplug the connector.

CAUTION
When reassembling the inner cover, do not forget
to plug the connector.

13. Remove 3 screws and 1 connector.

CAUTION
C U O
Be careful not to touch the LSU window.

14. Take out the LSU.

62
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.15 Frame-Duct
To remove the Frame-Duct. first, remove the toner carrtridge, imaging unit and side-unit. Refer to the
step 1~10 of the 3.14 LSU disassembly.

1. Remove 2 screws.

2. Remove the Frame-Duct.

63
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.16 DADF Unit

1. Remove the DADF cover after removing 1 screw.


2. Unplug the DADF connector and remove 1
screw.
screw

3. Lift up and release the DADF unit.

64
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 16 1 DADF C
3.16.1 Cover

1. Open the Stacker and Cover-Open. Remove 2 3. Remove 2 screws.


screws.

2 Remove the Cover-Side


2. Cover Side R by releasing the 4 Remove the Cover-Deco
4. Cover Deco F
F.
bottom hooks.

Hook

65
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

5. Remove 2 screw. 7. Remove the Cover-Side F.

6. Release the hook from the bottom.

Hook

66
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 16 2 DADF O
3.16.2 Open C
Cover

1. Remove the DADF covers. (Refer to 3.22.1.)


2. Release the DADF Open Cover by pushing it to
the direction of arrow.

3.16.3 DADF Stacker

1. Remove the DADF covers. (Refer to 3.22.1.)


2. Release the Stacker by pushing it and its holder
in the opposite direction.

67
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.16.4 DADF main board

1. Remove the Cover-Side R. (Refer to 3.22.1.)


2. Unplug all connectors on the board.
3. Remove the DADF main board after removing 2
screws.

68
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.16.5 DADF motor, solenoid, clu


utch

1. Remove the DADF covers. (Refer to 3.22.1.) 4. Remove 2 screws.


2. Unplug all connectors on the DADF board.

3. Remove 2 screw. 5. Lift up and release the DADF Frame Main after
removing 2 screws.

69
3-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

6. Release the harness holder after removing 2 8. Release the solenoid after removing 2 screws.
screws.

7. Unplug
p g the connector. Remove 4 screws. And 9. Remove 2 springs. Remove 2 screws. And
release the motor. release the bracket.

70
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

10. Remove the clutch.

3.16.6 DADF Detect/ Cover/ Regii sensor

1. Release the corresponding sensor after


unplugging connector.

[A] [C]

[B]

• A : Detect sensor
• B : Cover sensor
• C : Registration sensor

71
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 16 DADF E
3.16.7 Exit
i Idl
Idle sensor

1. Remove the motor bracket. (Refer to 3.22.4.)


2. Remove the sensor after unplugging the connector.

3.16.8 DADF Exit sensor

1. Remove the DADF Frame-Main.


1 Frame Main (Refer to 3 3.22.4.)
22 4 )
2. Remove the sensor after unplugging the connector.

72
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3 16 9 DADF Length
3.16.9 h / Wid
Width
h sens
sor

1. Remove the DADF Stacker. (Refer to 3.22.3.) 3. Remove the defective sensor after unplugging the
2. Remove the sensor cover after removing 3 connector.
screws.
• A, B : Paper Length sensor
•CC, D,
D E : Paper Width sensor

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D] [E]

73
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.17 Exit Unit

Perform the following procedure to remove the Exit Un


nit from the printer.

1. Open the Cover-Side. 4. Remove 1 screw and Exit cover [B].

[B]

2. Remove 4 fuser locking screws. 5. Unplug 2 connectors.


3. Remove the Fuser unit by holding the handles [A].

[A]

74
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

6. Remove 2 screws on left side of Exit Unit. 8. Remove the Exit Unit.

7. Remove 1 screw on right side of Exit Unit.

75
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.18 Regi. Unit

Perform the following procedure to remove the Regi. Unit


U from the printer.

1. Open the Cover-Side. 3. Remove the Regi Bracket Assembly after


removing 3 screws and Disconnect one connector.

2. Remove 3 screws and Harness cover [B].

[B]

76
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

4. Remove 6 screws, and remove Bracket-Regi [C], an


nd Bracket-Base Regi [D].

[C]

[D]

5. Regi Sensor[E] : Remove 1 screw.


6. OHP sensor[F] : Release hook from the bracket.

[E] [F]

77
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.19 Pick-Up Unit

Perform the following procedure to remove the Pick-up


p Unit from the printer.
1. Open the Tray1 [A], Tray2 [B] and Side Cover [C]. 3. Remove the pickup unit and unplug the connectors.

[C]

[A]

[B]

2. Remove 7 screws [D] and Harness Cover [E]. 4. Change Upper-limit Sensor [A], Empty Sensor [B]
and Take-away open sensor [C].

[C]

[ ]
[D]

[E]
[A] [B]

78
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

5. Remove the upper bracket [D] after removing 6 screw


ws.

[D]

6. Remove 2 screws.

79
3-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

3.20 Cassette heating cable

1. Remove 2 cassettes.

2. Remove 1 screw.

NOTE
You will need a short screwdriver.

3. Disconnect the Heating Cable connector and


remove the old Heating Cable Assembly.

80
3-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

4. Connect the new Heating Cable Assembly


connector [A] to printer connector [B].

[B] [A]

5. Insert 2 new heating cable assemblies in the


frame slits.

81
3-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
3.Replacemen
nt Procedure

6. Install 1 screw using a short screwdriver.

NOTE
You will need a short screwdriver.

82
3-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 Service Mode
4.
4.1. Entering/Exiting Service
e Mode
To enter the service mode, press 1,2,3 number keys
s simultaneously. When the password dialog box
appears, enter “1934” and press the “OK” button.
To exit the service mode, press the “Exit Service” bu
utton at the right upper corner of the display.
Selecting “Yes” in “Reboot Copier “will reboot the se
et.
Selecting “Yes” in “Reset Counter “will clear the cou
unt of “Information > General > Printed Impressions
since Last Call”.

4--1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 2 Service
4.2. S i Mode
M d Menu
M T
Tree
e
4.2.1. Information Tab

Menu Page
Machine Seriial Number
Network IP Address
A
General P. 4-6
Service Started Date
Printed Impre
essions since Last Call
Customer Re eplacement
Toner
Unit
Imaging Unit
Waste Toner Container
Fuser
Supply Status P. 4-6
Roller
Field Replace
ement Unit
Filter
DADF Roller
Finisher
Scanner
ware Version
System Firmw
Main Firmware Version
XOA Framew work Version
Portability Ve
ersion
Information Engine Firmw ware Version
S
Scan Firmwa
Fi are Version
V i
Image Conve erter Version
Fax Firmware e Version
UI Firmware Version
V
vpu Firmware e Version
ADF/ DADF Version
V
HCF Version
Software Version P. 4-8
DCF Version
Finisher Verssion
Booklet Firmw ware Version
Hole Puncher Firmware Version
Power Firmw ware Version
VPU Driver Version
V
Scan Driver Version
V
Fax Driver Ve ersion
Print CMS Ve ersion
Copy CMS Version
V
Scan CMS Ve ersion
IEM Version

4--2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Menu Page
PCL5E Version
PCLXL Version
PostScript / PDF / XPS Version
Boot Rom Version
Software Version P 4 -8
P.4
Boot Rom Boot Loader Version
Boot Rom OS Ve ersion
Boot Rom File Syystem Version
File System Version
Power On Hours
Service Hours P. 4-8
Information Power Save Hourrs
Fault Log P. 4-8
Supplies Informattion
Usage Counter Report
R
Fax Protocol Dummp List
Print Reports P. 4-8
Error Information Report
Maintenance Report
J bD
Job Duty RReport
RTF Format
Export Reports XML Format
PDF Format

4--3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 2 2 Maintenance C
4.2.2. Counts Tab

Menu Page
Fault Counts P. 4-9
Pick-up Jam
Feed Jam
Duplex Jam
Print Jam P. 4-10
Exit Jam
Finisher Jam
Booklet Jam
Jam Count Feed Jam
Regi Jam
Scan Jam
Maintenance
Scan Jam Exit Jam P. 4-11
Counts
Duplex Regi Jam
Duplex Scan Jam
Duplex Exit Jam
dge
Toner Cartrid
Imaging Carttridge
Fuser
Part Replacement
Roller P. 4-12
Count
Filter
DADF Rollerr
Fan Filter

4--4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 2 3 Diagnostics
4.2.3. Di ti T
Tab
b
Menu Page
Engine NVM Initialization P.4-13
Engine Diagnostics Engine NVM Read/Write P.4-13
Engine Test Routines P.4-16
x NVM Read/Write
Fax P.4-22
Fax Diagnostics Fax
x Test Routines P.4-23
Fax
x Dial Type
Shading Test P.4-25
Scanner
Sca e Diagnostics
ag ost cs Sca
anner/DADF
a e/ NVM Read/Write
ead/ te P.4-25
5
Diagnostics Sca
anner/DADF Test Routines P.4-26
Print Adjustment P.4-28
opy Adjustment
Co P.4-30
Sca
an Area Adjustment P.4-31
Adjustment
DA
ADF Adjustment P 4-33
P.4-33
Fin
nisher Adjustment P.4-35
Buckle Adjustment
ACS P.4-38
Color Management Auto Tone Adjustment P.4-39

4.2.4. Service Functions

Menu Page
Main Memory Clear P.4-40
Hard Disk Maintenance P.4-40
EIUL
Count Setting of Large Pages
Toner Save P.4-40
Port P.4-41
Service Functions Debug Log P.4-41
Capture Log P.4-41
System Recovery
User Data Management
Display Error Control
Hibernation Mode
C
Cool Down Mode

4--5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 3 Information
4.3 I f ti

4.3.1. General
• Information > General
This menu displays the machine’s serial number, ass
signed IP address, printed impressions since last
call, and the day of first service.

4.3.2. Supply Status

4.3.2.1. Customer Replacement Unit (CRU)


(

• Information > Supply Status > Customer Rep


placement Unit

This menu displays the machine’s customer replacem


ment unit status. Users can select one item in the list
to check the information of the selected unit.

4.3.2.2. Field Replacement Unit (FRU))

• Information > Supply Status > Field Replace


ement Unit

This menu displays the machine’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to
check the information of the selected unit.

In the CRU and FRU list, there are four columns : items, status, current, max life.
• Item : Refer to the table below.
• Status : This shows the current status of the selectted item.
• OK : The current count is smaller than the default
d warning value
• Check : The current count is bigger than de
efault warning value
• Off : The current count exceeds the max life
e.
• Count : This shows the current count of the selected d item.
• Max. life : This shows the max capacity of the selec
cted item.

Users can edit the default warning value within the giiven threshold.
Selecting
g some items will enable the reset button to reset
r the current count to 0 after replacing
p g the unit.

4--6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Default
Unit Items M
Max. Life Threshold
Warning Value
35K
Toner Cartridge Black 10% 5 ~ 30%
20K
Imaging Unit Black 80K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Waste Toner Waste Toner
300K Near Full NA
Container Container
Finisher Stapler
NA Near Empty NA
Cartridge
Booklet Stapler
Finisher NA Near Empty NA
Cartridge
Punch Waste
NA Full NA
Hopper
Fuser Fuser PM Count)
120K (P 10% 5% ~ 20%
P/up Roller MP 150K (P
PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
P/up Roller Kit-tray1 200K (P
PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
P/up Roller Kit-tray2 PM Count)
200K (P 10% 5% ~ 20%
Roller
P/up Roller Kit-tray3 NA 10% 5% ~ 20%
P/up Roller Kit-tray4 NA 10% 5% ~ 20%
P/up Roller HCF NA 10% 5% ~ 20%
Ozone Filter 150K (P
PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
Filter
Dust Filter 150K (P
PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
DADF Roller Assembly ADF Roller 200K (P
PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
Side Transfer Roller Unit 150K (P
PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
Scanner Fan Filter 180 day
ys 10% 5% ~ 10%

4--7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4.3.3. Software Version


• Information > Software Version
This menu displays all the version of the software ins
stalled in the system in detail. The following software
version will be shown in the menu.

• System Firmware • Hole Puncher Firmware


• Main Firmware • Print CMS
• Portability • Copy CMS
• XOA Framework • Scan CMS
• Engine Firmware • IEM
• Scan Firmware • Power Firmware
• Image Converter Firmware • PCL 5E
• Fax Firmware • PCL XL
• UI Firmware • PS3 / PDF / XPS
• ADF/DADF Firmware • Scan Driver
• DCF • Fax Driver
• HCF • Boot ROM
• Finisher Firmware • File System
• Booklet Firmware

4.3.4. Service Hours


• Information > Service Hours
This menu displays two items, “Power on Hours” and
d “Power Save Hours”.

• Power
P on H
Hours : It iindicates
di t th the h
hours off system
t power on since
i th
the fifirstt b
booting
ti off th
the system.
t
• Power Save Hours : It indicates the hours of system m power save since the first booting of the system.

4.3.5. Fault Log


• Information > Fault Log

This menu displays faults occurred while the system was operating.
Pressing clear button will clear all the save fault log of
o the system.

4--8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 3 6 Print
4.3.6. P i tR
Reports
t
• Information > Print Reports

This menu displays reports which that can be printed from the system. The following reports will be
available to print.
• Supplies Information *
• Fax Protocol Dump List
• Auto Color Registration Result
• Maintenance
• Job Duty
• Usage Counter Report **
• Error Information Report

4--9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 4 Maintenance
4.4. M i t Counts
C t

4.4.1. Fault Count


• Maintenance Counts > Fault Count

This menu di
Thi displays
l th
the ffault
lt C
Counts
t off th
the system.
t U
Users can select
l t one ffaultlt group and
d press “OK” to
t
see detailed fault descriptions. The detailed fault des
scription window displays engine diagnostic code and
descriptions of the fault along with the number of occcurrences.

The following list shows the group of the faults define


ed for the system.

• 11 Print Resource Management • A1 Motor


• 12 Print Job Management • A2 Fan
• 13 Print Channel Management • A3 Sensor
• 21 Copy Resource Management • C1 Toner Cartridge Unit
• 22 Copy Job Management • C3 Imaging Unit
• 31 Scan Resource Management • C7 Fusing unit
• 32 Scan Job Management • H1 Input (Trays) System
• 33 Scan Channel Management • H2 Output (Bins) System
• 34 Scan ScanToMail Service • H3 Duplex Feeder System
• 34 Scan ScanToFile Service • H4 Finisher System
• 34 Scan Network Scan • H5 Finisher's Booklet System
• 41 Fax Resource Management • M1 Input (Trays) System
• 42 Fax Job Management • M2 Media Path System
• 43 Fax Channel Management • M3 Output (Bins) System
• 51 Graphic User Interface Service • M4 Auto Document Feeder System
• 52 User Interface (Non Graphic) Service • P1 Payment Interface System
• 53 User Preference Service • P2 Foreign Device Interface System
• 54 Job Management (Retention) Service • S1 Video System
• 55 Authentication Service • S2 Engine System
• 56 Address Book Service • S3 Scan System
• 61 Diagnostics Service • S4 Fax System
• 62 Cloning Service • S5 UI System
• 63 Network Service • S6 Network System
• 64 Alert Management Service • S7 HDD System
• 65 Software Update Service • U1 Fusing Unit
• U2 LSU Unit
U it

10
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 4 2 Jam
4.4.2. J C
Count
t
• Maintenance Counts > Jam Count

This menu displays the jam Counts of the system. Us sers can select one jam group, which indicates the
location of jams, and press “OK” to see a detailed jam
m location along with the occurrence of the jam.

The following table shows the jam groups defined forr the system :

Jam Group Error Code Jam Location


M1-1615 Jam Bypass
M1-1113 Jam 0 Tray 1
M1-1213 Jam 0 Tray 2
Pick-up Jam
H1 1313
H1-1313 Jam 0 Tray 3 (DCF)
H1-1323 Jam 0 Tray 4 (DCF)
H1-1123 Jam 0 Tray 3 (HCF)
M2-1114 Jam Feed 1
M2-1124 Jam Feed 2
H1-1333 Jam Feed 3 (DCF)
Feed Jam
H1-1343
H1 1343 Jam Feed 4 (DCF)
M2-1213 Jam Regi
M2-1333 Jam Fuser Out
M2-2113 Jam Duplex 1
Duplex Jam M2-2215 Jam Duplex 2
M2-2413 Jam Duplex Return
M3-1213 Jam Exit In (Face Down)
Print Jam
M3-1214 Jam Exit Out (Face Down)
Exit Jam
M3-1313 Jam Exit In (Face Up)
M3-1314 Jam Exit Out (Face Up)
H4-1311 Finisher Jam 1
H4-1423 Finisher Jam 2
H4-1312 Finisher Jam 3
H4-1433 Finisher Jam 4
Finisher Jam H4-1133 Finisher Jam 5
H4-1123 Finisher Jam 6
H4-1111 Finisher Jam 7
H4-1214 Finisher Jam 8
H4-1221 Finisher Jam 9
H5 1511
H5-1511 Finisher Jam 10
H5-1523 Finisher Jam 11
Booklet Jam
H5-1531 Finisher Jam 12
H5-1543 Finisher Jam 13

11
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Jam Group Error Code Jam Location


M4-1112 Feed In Jam
Feed Jam M4-1113 Feed Out Jam
M4-1111 Feed Idle Jam
M4-1212
M4 1212 Regi In Jam
Regi Jam M4-1213 Regi Out Jam
M4-1211 Regi Idle Jam
M4-1312 Scan In Jam
Scan Jam M4-1313 Scan Out Jam
M4-1311 Scan Idle Jam
M4 1612
M4-1612 E it IIn JJam
Exit
Scan Jam Exit Jam M4-1613 Exit Out Jam
M4-1611 Exit Idle Jam
M4-1412 Duplex Regi In Jam
Duplex Regi Jam M4-1413 Duplex Regi Out Jam
M4-1411 Duplex Regi Idle Jam
M4-1512 Duplex Scan In Jam
Duplex Scan Jam M4-1513 Duplex Scan Out Jam
M4-1511 Duplex Scan Idle Jam
M4-1712 Duplex Exit In Jam
Duplex Exit Jam M4-1713 Duplex Exit Out Jam
M4 1711
M4-1711 Duplex Exit Idle Jam

12
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 4 3 Part Replacement Count


4.4.3. C

• Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Cou


unt

This menu displays the replacement Counts for the system


s parts. Users can select one part group and
press “OK” to see the exact name of the part along with
w the occurrence of the replacement.

The following table shows groups of the replaceable parts of the system
system.

Unit Item Sensing Method


Toner Cartridge Toner (B
Black) Auto Sensing
Imaging Cartridge Imaging
g Unit (Black) Auto Sensing
Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing
oller MP
P/up Ro Count Clear
P/up Ro
oller Kit-tray1 Count Clear
P/up Ro
oller Kit-tray2 Count Clear
Roller
P/up Ro
oller Kit-tray3 Count Clear
P/up Ro
oller Kit-tray4 Count Clear
P/up Ro
oller HCF Count Clear
Ozone Filter
F Count Clear
Filter
Dust Filter Count Clear
DADF Roller Assemb
bly ADF Roller Count Clear
Scanner Scanner Fan Filter Count Clear

13
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 5 Diagnostics
4.5. Di ti

4.5.1. Engine Diagnostics

4.5.1.1. NVM Read/Write

• Self Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > NVM In


nitialization

Restore NVM value to the factory default settin


ngs.

• Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > NVM Rea


ad/Write

Purpose To change a configuration value


e for engine firmware.
Operation When the main “NVM Read/Wriite” window displays, users can navigate through
Procedure the list of codes with description
ns and saved values.
Users can also input a code to the
t text box to find a configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, pressing “Edit” button will open an interface for user
input.

Code NVM Description Meaning Default Max/Min

104-0000 Pick up roller Life Page Counter p roller Life Page Counter
Pick up 32bit
104-0030 T2 Pick-Up Roller Life Page Counter T2 Pick
k-Up Roller Life Page Counter 32bit
104-0040 T3 Pick-Up Roller Life Page Counter T3 Pick
k-Up Roller Life Page Counter 32bit
104-0050 T4 Pick-Up Roller Life Page Counter T4 Pick
k-Up Roller Life Page Counter 32bit
104-0070 Bypass PickUp Roller Life Page Counter Bypass
s PickUp Roller Life Page Counter 32bit
104-0200 Transfer Roller Life Page Counter Transfe
er Roller Life Page Counter 32bit
nce Cycle to clean charger in Enviro
Charger Clean Reference Cycle for Enviro Referen 10,000
105-0200 120000
ment0 ment 0 300,000
nce Cycle to clean charger in Enviro
Charger Clean Reference Cycle for Enviro Referen 10,000
105-0210 120000
ment1 ment 1 300,000
Charger Clean Reference C
Cycle
cle for En
Enviro
iro Referen
nce C
Cycle
cle to clean charger in Enviro
En iro 10 000
10,000
105-0220 120000
ment2 ment 2 300,000
nce Cycle to clean charger in Enviro
Charger Clean Reference Cycle for Enviro Referen 10,000
105-0230 120000
ment3 ment 3 300,000
Referen
nce Cycle to clean charger in Enviro
Charger Clean Reference Cycle for Enviro 10,000
105-0240 ment 4 120000
ment4 300,000

Charger C
C Clean Reference
f Cycle
C for
f Enviro Referen
f nce Cycle
C to clean charger in Enviro 10,000
105-0250 90000
ment5 ment 5 300,000
nce Cycle to clean charger in Enviro
Charger Clean Reference Cycle for Enviro Referen 10,000
105-0260 60000
ment6 ment 6 300,000
nce Cycle to clean charger in Enviro
Charger Clean Reference Cycle for Enviro Referen 10,000
105-0270 60000
ment7 ment 7 300,000
Charger Clean Reference Cycle for Enviro Referennce Cycle to clean charger in Enviro 10,000
105-0280
105 0280 60000
ment8
t8 mentt 8 300,000
300 000

14
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Code NVM Description Meaning Default Max/Min


107-0080 Transfer2 High Voltage(THV2) Transfer2 HV 0~255
107-0090 Transfer2 High Voltage(THV2) Duplex Transfer2 HV of Duplex 0~255
107-0120 Saw Plate Duty (Detack Bias Control) Saw Plate Duty 0~255
Target Temperature during standby mo
109-0010 StandBy Temperature offset 0 -5/5
de.
Target Temperature during Power save
109-0020 Low Power Temperature offset 0 -5/5
modee.
109-0030 Thin(60~70gsm) Temperature offset Target Temperature for thin paper. 0 -5/5
109-0040 Plain(70~90gsm) Temperature offset Target Temperature for plain paper. 0 -5/5
109-0050
109 0050 Thick(90
Thick(90~105gsm)
105gsm) Temperature offset Target Temperature for thick paper. 0 -5/5
5/5
Heavy(106~175gsm) Temperature offs
109-0060 Target Temperature for heavy paper. 0 -5/5
et
Extra Heavy1(176~216gsm) Temperat Target Temperature for extra heavy1 p
109-0070 0 -5/5
ure offset aper.
Extra Heavy2(217~253gsm) Temperat Target Temperature for extra heavy2 p
109-0080 0 -5/5
ure offset aper.
Recycled paper(70
paper(70~90gsm)
90gsm) Temperatu
TemperatuTarg
Target Temperature for Recycled pape
109-0090 0 -5/5
re offset r.
Mediia type offset for fuser roll temperat
109-0150 Transparency Temperature offset 0 -5/5
ure.
Mediia type offset for fuser roll temperat
109-0170 Envelopes Temperature offset 0 -5/5
ure.
Mediia type offset for fuser roll temperat
p
109-0180 Labels Temperature offset 0 -5/5
ure.
ure
109-0190 Thin(60~70gsm) Pressure Offset ng nip pressure ofset for thin paper
Fusin 0 -5/5
Fusin
ng nip pressure offset for envelope
109-0200 Envelopes Pressure Offset 0 -5/5
s
109-0210 Fuser Bias Offset er bias offset
Fuse TBD TBD
109-0220 Fuser Bias Duty Fuse
er Bias Duty TBD

* Environment

15
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4.5.1.2. Engine Test Routines

• Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test


T Routines

Purpose To perform test routines for the engine.


Operation When the main Engine Test Rou utines window displays, users can navigate
Procedure through the list of routines that display
d along with their descriptions. Users can
also directly input an EDC code e to the text box to find a routine. Users can select
a maximum of 3 routines at the same time.
After selecting one or multiple rooutines, pressing the “OK” button will open the test
window that lists selected routinnes. Users can start/stop a desired test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A

Code Displayed Name Meaning


100-0010 Tray1 feed motor (Main feed motor) ay1 feed motor on/off
Tra
100-0030 Tray3 feed motor (Option feed motor) Tra
ay3 feed motor on/off
100-0070 Tray1 elevating motor Tra
ay1 elevate motor on/off
100-0080 Tray2 elevating motor Tra
ay2 elevate motor on/off
100-0170 Duplex motor forward Duplex motor forward on/off
100-0210 Exit2 motor forward Exit2 motor forward running/stop
100-0220 Exit2 motor backward Exit2 motor backward running/stop
100 0250 Duplex motor Half Speed
100-0250 Duplex motor Half Speed on/off
100-0260 Main motor Ma
ain motor is on/off
100-0300 Black OPC/DEV motor Bla
ack OPC/DEV motor is on/off
100-0410 Toner supply motor black Toner dispense(supply) motor on/off
100-0420 Waste toner motor Wa
aste toner motor on/off
100-0440 Fuser motor Fus
ser motor forward on/off
100-0460 Fuser gap motor Fus
ser press control motor on/off
100-5070 Black OPC/DEV motor ready De
etect if black OPC/DEV motor runs at normal speed
100-5160 Fuser motor ready De
etect if fuser motor runs at normal speed
100-5200 LSU motor1 run ready De
etects if LSU motor1 runs at normal speed.
101-0010 Tray1 pick up clutch Engages drive to pick up a paper from tray1.
101 0020 Tray2 pick up clutch
101-0020 Engages drive to pick up a paper from tray2
tray2.
101-0030 Tray3 pick up clutch Engages drive to pick up a paper from tray3.
101-0040 Tray4 pick up clutch Engages drive to pick up a paper from tray4.
101-0070 Bypass pick up clutch Byp
pass Pickup clutch(MP Tray).

16
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Code Displayed Name Meaning


101-0150 Registration clutch Re
egistration clutch
101-0160 Duplex clutch Du
uplex clutch
101-0240 Black Dev clutch En
ngages drive to color, motor dev
102-0020 Tray1 paper empty sensor De
etect when paper is in tray1.
102-0100 Tray1 feed sensor De
etect when a paper is at feed sensor.
102-0130 Tray2 paper empty sensor De
etect when paper is in tray2.
102-0210 Tray2 feed sensor De
etect when a paper is at tray2 feed sensor. (optional)
102-0240 Tray3 paper empty sensor De
etect when paper is in tray3.
102-0320 Tray3 feed sensor De
etect when a paper is at tray3 feed sensor. (optional)
102-0350 Tray4 paper empty sensor De
etect when paper is in tray4.
102-0440 Tray4 feed sensor De
etect when a paper is at tray4 feed sensor. (optional)
102-0460 Bypass paper empty sensor De
etects when paper is in bypass tray(MP tray).
102-0580 Regi. sensor De
etect when a paper is at Regi. sensor.
102-0590 Exit sensor De
etect when a paper is at exit sensor.
102-0600 Duplex jam1 sensor De
etect when a paper is at duplex jam1 sensor.
102-0610 Duplex jam2 sensor De
etect when a paper is at duplex jam2 sensor.
102-0630 Fuserout sensor De
etect when a paper is at fuserout .
102-0650 Inner Tray De
etect Inner Tray(Option)
102-0690 Out-Bin1 full sensor De
etect outbin full status of expander.
102-0700 Out-Bin2 full sensor De
etect outbin2 full status of expander.
102-0710 Main tray feed Cover De
etect when main tray is closed.
102-0720 Option tray feed Cover De
etect when option tray is closed.
102-5000 Tray1 paper size number De
etect size enum of paper in tray1
102-5010 Tray2 paper size number De
etect size enum of paper in tray2
102-5020 Tray3 paper size number De
etect size enum of paper in tray3
102-5030 Tray4 paper size number De
etect size enum of paper in tray4
102-5040 Bypass paper size number De
etect size enum of paper in bypass tray(MP tray).
105-5030 Black charger cleaning sensor De
etect cleaning sensor
107-0150 Detach bias De
etach(Saw) bias voltage on at normal drive level
109-0080 Fuser gap home sensor De
etect if the fuser press is located Home position.
109-0130 Fuser bias Fu
user bias voltage on at normal drive level

17
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Code Displayed Name Meaning


116-0330 Fnsh Stacker motor Ru
un/Stop Stacker motor
116-0340 Fnsh Staple motor Ru
un/Stop Staple motor
116-0350 Fnsh Stopper motor Ru
un/Stop Stopper motor
116-0360 Fnsh Front tamper motor Ru
un/Stop Front tamper motor
116-0370 Fnsh Rear tamper motor Ru
un/Stop Rear tamper motor
116-5010 Fnsh Bridge entrance sensor De
etect paper at bride exit
116-5020 Fnsh Bridge exit sensor De
etect paper at finisher entrance
116-5030 Fnsh entrance sensor De
etect paper at finisher top tray
116-5040 Fnsh r top exit sensor De
etect paper at compile exit
116-5050 Fnsh compile exit sensor De
etect paper at compile
116-5060 Fnsh Subset thickness sensor De
etect thickness of paper
116-5070 Fnsh Manual staple paper sensor De
etect paper at manual staple area
116-5080 Fnsh Manual staple button sensor De
etect manual staple button is on/off
116-5090 Fnsh Staple prime sensor De
etect paper at prime staple area
116-5100 Fnsh Staple not low sensor De
etect staple low
116-5110 Fnsh Full stack sensor De
etect quantity of paper at stack
116-5120 Fnsh Over stack sensor Ch
heck Stack if paper is over
116-5130 Fnsh Stack upper limit switch Ch
heck Stack if paper is full
116-5140 Fnsh Power supply sensor Ch
heck power supply status
116-5150 Fnsh Door open sensor De
etect door status
116-5160 Fnsh Cover open sensor De
etect cover status
116-5170 Fnsh Power charge sensor Ch
heck power charge
116-5180 Fnsh DIP switch 2 Ch
heck DIP switch 2 status
116-5190 Fnsh DIP switch 3 Ch
heck DIP switch 3 status
116-5200 Fnsh DIP switch 4 Ch
heck DIP switch 4 status
116-5210 Fnsh Bridge unit detect De
etect bridge unit
116-5220 Fnsh Punch unit detect De
etect punch unit
116-5230 Fnsh Booklet unit detect De
etect booklet unit
116-5250 Fnsh Compile paper sensor Ch
heck hardware version
116-5300 Fnsh Diverter position sensor De
etect divert position
116-5310 Fnsh Paddle home sensor De
etect paddle home position
116-5320 Fnsh Tamp front home sensor De
etect tamp front home position
116-5330 Fnsh Tamp
p rear home sensor De
etect tamp
p rear home p
position

18
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Code Displayed Name Meaning


116-5340 Fnsh Stapler main home sensor De
etect stapler main home position
116-5350 Fnsh Stapler clinch home sensor De
etect clinch home position
116-5360 Fnsh Stapler clinch position sensor De
etect clinch position position
116-5370 Fnsh Stapler sub home sensor De
etect staple sub home position
116-5380 Fnsh Stapler safety position sensor De
etect stapler safety position
116-5390 Fnsh Ejector home sensor De
etect eject home position
116-5400 Fnsh Ejector encoder sensor De
etect ejector Encoder
116-5410 Fnsh Support finger home sensor De
etect support-finger home position
116-5420 Fnsh Clamp home sensor De
etect clamp home position
116-5430 Fnsh Clamp reverse sensor De
etect clamp reverse position
116-5440 Fnsh Stack encoder sensor Ch
heck stack encoder
116-5460 Fnsh Punch Scan home sensor Ch
heck scan home
116-5470 Fnsh Punch Scan Edge 1 sensor Ch
heck Scan Edge 1
116-5480 Fnsh Punch Scan Edge 2 sensor Ch
heck Scan Edge 2
116-5490 Fnsh Punch Scan Edge 3 s or Ch
heck Scan Edge 3
116-5500 Fnsh Punch home sensor Ch
heck Punch home
116-5510 Fnsh Punch position A sensor Ch
heck Punch position A
116-5520 Fnsh Punch position B sensor Ch
heck Punch position B
116-5530 Fnsh Punch Encoder sensor Ch
heck Punch Encoder
116-5540 Fnsh Punch Hopper set sensor Ch
heck Hopper set
116-5550 Fnsh Feed entrance sensor Ch
heck Feed entrance
116-5560 Fnsh Feed exit sensor Ch
heck Feed exit
116-5570 Fnsh Tray
y paper
p p sensor Ch
heck Tray
y paper
p p
116-5580 Fnsh Fold exit sensor Ch
heck Fold exit
116-5590 Fnsh Fold motor ready Ch
heck Fold motor ready
116-5600 Fnsh Knife home sensor Ch
heck Knife home
116-5610 Fnsh Knife motor ready Ch
heck Knife motor ready
116-5620 Fnsh Gate home sensor Ch
heck Gate home
116-5630 Fnsh Guide home sensor Ch
heck Guide home
116-5640 Fnsh Booklet Maker Paddle home sensor Ch
heck Booklet Maker Paddle home
116-5650 Fnsh Stacker full sensor Ch
heck Stacker full
116-5660 Fnsh Stapler home sensor Ch
heck Stapler home
116-5670
116 5670 Fnsh Low staple 1 sensor Ch
heck Low staple 1

19
4-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Code Displayed Name Meaning


116-5680 Fnsh Low staple 2 sensor Ch
heck Low staple 2
116-5690 Fnsh Stopper home sensor Ch
heck Stopper home
116-5700 Fnsh Front tamper home sensor Ch
heck Front tamper home
116-5710 Fnsh Rear tamper home sensor Ch
heck Rear tamper home
116-5720 Fnsh Stapler safety intlock switch Co
ontrol safety interlock switch on/off
116-5730 Fnsh Punch Module Dip switch 1 on//off Punch Module Dip switch 1
116-5740 Fnsh Punch Module Dip switch 2 on//off Punch Module Dip switch 2
116-5750 Fnsh Booklet Maker dip switch1 on//off Booklet Maker dip switch1
116-5760 Fnsh Booklet Maker dip switch2 on//off Booklet Maker dip switch2
116-5770 Fnsh Booklet Maker dip switch3 on//off Booklet Maker dip switch3
116-5780 Fnsh Booklet Maker dip switch4 on//off Booklet Maker dip switch4
122-0010 Duplex fan1 run Sta
art/Stop duplex fan1 run
122-0100 Fuser out fan run Sta
art/Stop fuser out fan
122-0110 SMPS In fan run Sta
art/Stop SMPS in fan
122-0140 Ozone suction fan run Sta
art/Stop ozone suction fan
122-5000 Dupelx fan1 run ready De
etects if duplex fan1 runs at normal speed.
122-5090 Fuser out fan run ready De
etects if fuser-out fan runs at normal speed.
122-5110 SMPS out fan run ready De
etects if SMPS-out fan runs at normal speed.
122-5130 Ozone suction fan run ready De
etects if ozone suction fan motor runs at normal speed.
123-0010 Fuser center temperature Dis
splay fuser center temperature
123-0060 Outter temperature Dis
splay outter temperature
123-0070 Outter humidity Dis
splay outter humidity

20
4-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 2 Fax Diagnostics
4.5.2.
4.5.2.1. Fax NVM Read/Write
• Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax NVM Re
ead/Write

Purpose To change a configuration value


e for fax firmware.
Operation When the main “NVM Read/Wriite” window displays, users can navigate through
Procedure the list of configuration values th
hat display along with description.
Users can also input a code to thet text box to find a configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, pressing “Edit” button will open an interface for user
input.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A

Code Code
Displayed Name
N Default
(Line 1) (Line 2)
20-200 21-200 Pause Dial Time 1
20-210 21-210 Dial Pulse M/B ratio 0
20-220 21-220 Auto Dial Start Pause Time
T 1
20-300 21-300 Ring On Time 170
20-310 21-310 Ring Off Time 560
20-320 21-320 Ring
g Detection Freq
q 1
20-400 21-400 DTMF High-Freq Level 8
20-410 21-410 DTMF Low-Freq Level 11
20-420 21-420 DTMF Timing 5
20-520 21-520 Error Rate 2
20-530
20 530 21-530
21 530 Dial Tone Detect 0
20-540 21-540 Loop Current Detect 0
20-550 21-550 Busy Signal Detect 0
20-700 21-700 Line Monitor Setting 0
20-800 21-800 Modem Speed 7
20 810
20-810 21 810
21-810 Fax Transmission Level 12
20-830 21-830 Auto Dial Timeout 55
20-999 21-999 Fax Line Setting

21
4-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 5 2 2 Fax
4.5.2.2. F Test
T t Routines
R ti

• Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax Test Rou


utines

Purpose To perform test routines for the fax machine.


Operation When the main Fax Test Routin nes window displays, users can navigate through
Procedure the list of routines that display
p y alongg with description.
p Users can also input
p a code
to the text box to find a routine directly.
d
After selecting one routine, pres ssing “OK” button will open the test window that
lists selected routine. Users can n start/stop a desired test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A

Code (Line 1) Code (Line 2) Displayed Name


20-012 21-012 Single Tone 110 Hz
20-014 21-014 Single Tone 1650 Hz
20-015 21-015 Single Tone 1850 Hz
20-016 21-016 Single Tone 2100 Hz
20-020 21-020 DMTF # Line
20-021 21-021 DMTF * Line
20-022 21-022 DMTF 0 Line
20-023 21-023 DMTF 1 Line
20-024 21-024 DMTF 2 Line
20-025 21-025 DMTF 3 Line
20-026 21-026 DMTF 4 Line
20-027 21-027 DMTF 5 Line
20-028 21-028 DMTF 6 Line
20-029 21-029 DMTF 7 Line
20-030 21-030 DMTF 8 Line
20-031 21-031 DMTF 9 Line
20-040 21-040 V.21 300 bps
20-041
20 041 21-041
21 041 V.27ter 2400 bps
20-042 21-042 V.27ter 4800 bps
20-043 21-043 V.29 7200 bps
20-044 21-044 V.29 9600 bps
20-045 21-045 V.17 7200 bps

22
4-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Code (Line 1) Code (Line 2) Displayed Name


20-046 21-046 V.17 9600 bps
20-047 21-047 V.17 12000 bps
20-048 21-048 V.17 14400 bps
20-049 21-049 V.34 2400 bps
20-050 21-050 V.34 4800 bps
20-051 21-051 V.34 7200 bps
20-052 21-052 V.34 9600 bps
20-053 21-053 V.34 12000 bps
20-054 21-054 V.34 14400 bps
20-055 21-055 V.34 16800 bps
20-056 21-056 V.34 19200 bps
20-057 21-057 V.34 21600 bps
20-058 21-058 V.34 24000 bps
20-059 21-059 V.34 26400 bps
20-060 21-060 V.34 28800 bps
20-061 21-061 V.34 31200 bps
20-062 21-062 V.34 33600 bps

23
4-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 3 Scanner
4.5.3. S Diagnostics

4.5.3.1. Shading Test


• Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading
g Test

Purpose To check quality of scanned ima ages, especially defect in optical devices, including
lens, mirror, lamp, and etc, are suspected.
s
Operation Press "Share and Print report“ to
o see if the current shading value is correct.
Procedure Mono, red, green, blue gray shaading values will be shown on the printed report.
When the previous shading valu ue is needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A

4.5.3.2. Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Writte


• Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write

Purpose To read and/or write values in th


he scanner and DADF memory.
Operation When the main “NVM Read/Wriite” window displays, users can navigate through
Procedure the list of codes with description
ns and saved values.
Users can also directly input a code
c to the text box to find a NVM.
After selecting a code,
code the “Edit”
Edit” button will be enabled only if the code is writable
writable.
If the selected code is writable and
a the “Edit” button is enabled, press the button to
configure the desired value for the
t code.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A

Code NVM Description Meaning Access


05-0000 Pick up Count Pick up Roller Life Count Read Only
05-0010 Document Duplex Reverse Point Document Duplex Reverse Point Read/Write
05-0020 Document Exit Turn Reverse Point Document Exit Turn Reverse Point Read/Write

24
4-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4.5.3.3. Scanner/DADF Test Routines


s
• Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/DADF Test Routines

Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and DADF.


Operation When the main scanner/DADF Test T Routines window displays, users can
Procedure navigate through the list of routines that display along with description.
Users can also input a code to the
t text box to find a routine directly.
After selecting one routine, presssing “OK” button will open the test window that
lists selected routine. Users cann start/stop a desired test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A

Code Meaning
g Access

05-0000 Document Length .1 Sensor High/Low

05-0001 Document Length .2 Sensor High/Low

05-0020 Document Cover Open Sensor High/Low

05-0040 Document Detect Sensor High/Low

05-0060 Document Simplex Registration Senso


or High/Low

05-0070 Document Scan Read Sensor High/Low

05-0080 Document Exit Sensor High/Low

05-0081 Document Exit IDLE Sensor High/Low

05-0090 Document Duplex Registration Sensor High/Low

05-0100 Document Exit Turn Sensor High/Low

05-0110 Document Junction Gate Solenoid On/Off

05-0111 Document Motor Backward Running/Stop

05-0120 Document width1 Sensor High/Low

05-0121 Document width2 Sensor High/Low

05-0122 Document width3 Sensor High/Low

25
4-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

Code Meaning
g Access

05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Speed Simple


ex Running/Stop

05-0220 Document Jig Test Low Speed Duplex


x Running/Stop

05-0230 Document Jig Test High Speed Simple


ex Running/Stop

05-0240 Document Jig Test High Speed Duplex


x Running/Stop

06-0000 Scanner Original Size Detecting Sensor 1 High/Low

06 0001
06-0001 S
Scanner Original
O i i l Si
Size Detecting
D t ti S Sensor 2 Hi h/L
High/Low

06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/Close Sensor 1 High/Low

06-0011 Scanner Cover Open/Close Sensor 2 High/Low

06-0020 Scanner Platen Motor Forward Running/Stop

26
4-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 5 4 Adjustment
4.5.4. Adj t t
4.5.4.1. Print Adjustment
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustmen
nt > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose To correct image position of prin


nt-outs automatically.

Operation 1. Press “Paper Supply” button n and select a tray.


Procedure 2. Press “Paper Size” button and
a select a paper size of the previously selected
tray.
3. Press “Print” button. A test pattern
p will be printed out.
4. Press “Next” button. The sy ystem ask to locate the test pattern.
5. Locate the front side of Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass . Note that
ADF cannot be used.
6 Press “OK”
6. OK button.
button Automa atic scanning will occur .
7. Locate the back side of Sca anner A/S Chart at the scanner glass again and
press “OK” button once mo ore.
8. The system will automatica ally calculate the proper value based on scanning
result of the test pattern.
9. The new value s are set to the
t system.
Verification sition of scale marks (ⓐ,ⓑ,ⓔ,ⓕ) in the image are
Print out and check if all the pos
located within the specified limitt.
Specification ⓐ,ⓑ,ⓔ,ⓕ : 10mm, ± 1.5mm

Front
o Side
de Back
ac Side
de

4-2
27
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustmen


nt > Magnification

Purpose To correct magnification of printt-outs manually.

Operation 1. Press “Vertical Magnificatio


on” or “Horizontal Magnification”
Procedure 2 Vertical magnification (c,g)
2. (c g) : If the current value is smaller than the
specification, press”+”. Otheerwise, press “-”.
3. Horizontal magnification(d,hh) : If the current value is smaller than the
specification, press”+”. Otheerwise, press “-”.

Example Vertical Horizontal


Cases Adjustment Adjustment
ⓒ or ⓖ = 398.0
398 0 m
mm +20

ⓒ or ⓖ = 402.5 mm
m -25

ⓓ or ⓗ = 275.3 mm
m +17

ⓓ or ⓗ = 278.9 mm
m -19

Verification Print out and measure if the length of vertical (400mm) and horizontal line
(277mm) in the print-out are corrrect.
Specification ⓒ,ⓖ : 400mm, ± 1.5mm (A3)
ⓓ,ⓗ : 277mm, ± 1.5mm (A3)

• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustmen


nt > Image Position

Purpose To correct image position of print-outs manually.

Operation 1. Select a tray required adjus


stment.
Procedure 2. Change the adjustment valu ue with arrow button. “+” value will move to Tail-
Edge while “-” value will mo
ove to Lead-Edge.

Example Sim
mplex Simplex Duplex Duplex
Cases Lea
ading Side Edge Leading Side Edge
Ed
dge Edge
ⓐ = 8.5 mm +
+15

ⓑ = 11.6 mm -16

ⓔ = 8.0
8 0 mm +20

ⓕ = 13.0 mm -30

Verification sition of scale marks (ⓐ,ⓑ,ⓔ,ⓕ) in the image are


Print out and check if all the pos
located within the specified limitt.
Specification ⓐ,ⓑ,ⓔ,ⓕ : 10mm, ± 1.5mm

28
4-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4.5.4.2. Copy Adjustment


• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustmen
nt > Image Position

Purpose To correct image position of cop


pied images manually.

Operation 1. Select a tray required adjustment.


Procedure 2 Change the adjustment valu
2. ue with arrow button
button. “+”
+ value will move to Tail-
Edge while “-” value will move to Lead-Edge.

Example Simp
plex Simplex Simplex Simplex
Cases Lead
ding Side Edge Leading Side Edge
Edg
ge Edge
ⓐ = 11.5 mm -1
15

ⓑ = 8.4 mm -16

ⓔ = 12.0 mm -20

ⓕ = 7.0 mm +30

Verification 1. Copy the Scanner A/S Charrt . Scanning must be occur at the scanner glass .
2. Check if all the position of scale marks (ⓐ,ⓑ, ⓔ,ⓕ ) in the image are located
within the specified limit.
Specification ⓐ,ⓑ,ⓔ,ⓕ : 10mm, ± 1.5mm

29
4-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4.5.4.3. Scan Area Adjustment

• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjus


stment > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose To correct image position and magnification


m of scanned images automatically.
Operation 1. Locate the Scanner A/S Cha art at the scan glass . Note that “Lead Edge”
Procedure arrows need to head to the left side of scan glass and to be placed face down.
Al note
Also t th
thatt th
the S
Scanner A
A/S Charts
Ch t come in i ttwo sizes,
i A4 and
dLLetter
tt .
Choose one size to meet yo our primary size of use.
2. Press “OK” button. Automa atic scanning will occur ,and the system will
automatically calculate the proper
p value based on scanning result of the chart .
3. The new value set to the tabble.
Verification 1. Scan the Scanner A/S Charrt and send it to a PC. Scanning must be occur
from the scan glass.
2 To check the image position,
2. n compare the position of scale marks (ⓐ
(ⓐ,ⓑ)ⓑ) of
the chart to the copy.
3. To check the magnification, compare the length of line ⓒ of the chart to the
copy.
Specification ⓐ,ⓑ : 10 , ± 1.5mm
ⓒ : 190 , ± 1.5mm

30
4-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjus


stment > Manual Adjustment

Purpose To correct image position and magnification


m of scanned images manually. This
function is used when a result of
o automatic adjustment does not satisfy the
expectation.
Operation 1 Choose one item from the
1. e table
table. There are three items to choose
choose.
Procedure • Image Position - Le eading Edge
• Image Position - Side Edge
• Magnification - Verttical Direction
2. Select one item and press the
t “Edit” button.
3. Change the adjustment valu ue with arrow button.
4. Image Position (ⓐ, ⓑ) : If the
t current value is smaller than the specification,
press “+”. Otherwise, presss “-”.
5 Magnification (ⓒ) : If the cu
5. urrent value is smaller than the specification
specification, press
“-”. Otherwise, press “+”.
6. Press the “OK” button to appply the new value to the system.

Example Leading Side Vertical Direction


Cases Edge Edge Adjustment
ⓐ = 11.0 mm -10

ⓑ = 9.0 mm +10

ⓒ = 191.7 mm +0.8% (-3.4mm)

ⓒ = 188.1 mm -0.4% (near +1.8mm)

* Note that value of magnification adjustment needs to be calculated based on A3


size, 420mm ((190mm + 10mm m*2)*2) if the used Scanner A/S Chart is A4 size.
Verification 1. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. Scanning must be occur
from the scan glass.
on, compare the position of scale marks (ⓐ,ⓑ) of
2. To check the image positio
the chart to the copy.
3. To check the magnification,, compare the length of line ⓒ of the chart to the
copy .
Specification ⓐ,ⓑ : 10 , ± 1.5mm
ⓒ : 190 , ± 1.5mm

Image Position Unit: mm, Scale e: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6


Magnification Unit: %, Scale: 0.1(0.42mm), Min/Max: 99/101

31
4-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4.5.4.4. DADF Adjustment

• Diagnostics > Adjustment > DADF Adjustmen


nt > Automatic Adjustment

Purpose To correct image position and magnification


m of scanned images via DADF
automatically.
Operation 1. Locate the Scanner A/S Cha art at the DADF. Note that “Lead Edge” arrows
Procedure
P d needd tto h
head
d tto ffeeding
di didire
ection
ti and d to
t be
b placed
l d face
f up. Also
Al notet th
thatt the
th
Scanner A/S Charts come in n two size, A4 and Letter . Choose one size to
meet your primary size of us se.
2. Press “OK” button. Automa atic scanning will occur ,and the system will
automatically calculate the proper
p value based on scanning result of the chart .
3. The new values are set to th he table.
Verification 1. Copy the Scanner A/S Charrt. Scanning must be occur from the DADF.
2. To check the image position,
2 n compare the position of scale marks (ⓐ
(ⓐ,ⓑ)ⓑ) of
the chart to the copy.
3. To check the magnification, compare the length of line ⓒ of the chart to the
copy .
Specification ⓐ,ⓑ : 10 ±, 1.5mm
ⓒ : 190 ±, 1.5mm

32
4-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

• Diagnostics > Adjustment > DADF Adjustme


ent > Manual Adjustment

Purpose To correct image position and magnification


m of scanned images via DADF
manually. This function is used
d when a result of automatic adjustment does not
satisfy the expectation.
Operation
p 1. Choose one item from the e table. There are three items to choose.
Procedure • Image Position - Simplex Leading Edge
• Image Position – Simplex Side Edge
• Magnification – Verrtical Direction
2. Select one item and press thet “Edit” button.
3. Change the adjustment valu ue with arrow button.
4. Image Position (Simplex Le eading Edge, ⓐ) : If the current value is smaller
than the specification, press s “+”. Otherwise, press “-”.
5. Image Position (Simplex Sid de Edge, ⓑ) : If the current value is smaller than
the specification, press “-”. Otherwise, press “+”.
6. Magnification (ⓒ) : If the cuurrent value is smaller than the specification, press
“-”. Otherwise, press “+”.
7. Press the “OK” button to ap pply the new value to the system.

Example Leading Side Vertical Direction


Cases Edge Edge Adjustment
ⓐ = 11.5 mm -15

ⓑ = 8.8 mm -12

ⓒ = 191.3 mm +0.6% (near -2.6mm)

ⓒ = 188.0 mm -0.5% (near +2.0mm)

* Note that value of magnification adjustment needs to be calculated based on A3


size, 420mm ((190mm + 10mm m*2)*2) if the used Scanner A/S Chart is A4 size.
Verification 1. Copy the Scanner A/S Chart. Scanning must be occur from the DADF.
on, compare the position of scale marks (ⓐ,ⓑ) of
2. To check the image positio
the chart to the copy.
3. To check the magnification,, compare the length of line ⓒ of the chart to the
copy .

Specification ⓐ,ⓑ : 10 , ± 1.5mm


ⓒ : 190 , ± 1.5mm

Image Position Unit: mm, Scale e: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6


Magnification Unit: %, Scale: 0.1(0.42mm), Min/Max: 99/101

33
4-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4.5.4.5. Buckle Adjustment

• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Buckle Adjustment

Buckle Adjustment is the function to adjust the paper curl for paper type.
Curl means a bent level of paper at regi. Rollerr during waiting time.

Fuser

The more curled paper is, the better it is for skew ad


djustment.
But, the excessive curled paper can be caused by a wrapped paper, noise.

This menu can adjust the curl level for Simplex(Tray


y), Simplex(MP), Duplex.

Caution
This machine is set to optical curl level from the facttory. So, do not adjust a curl level as possible.

37
4-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

◆ Default Curl Value for paper type (mm)

Range : +/- 2mm

Caution - The excessive curled paper can be caused by


b a feed problem.

38
4-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4
4.5.5. ACS
CS
• Diagnostics > ACS

Purpose To set the color sensing level off auto color mode in scan function.
Operation Change the level from 1 to 5.
Procedure While the level 1 is the most color sensitive, the level 5 is the most monochrome
sensitive.
Verification N/A
Specification
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
Color 0.1 % 0.4 % 1.0 % 1.5 % 2.0 %
Coverage

39
4-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 5 6 Color
4.5.6. C l MManagementt

4.5.6.1. Scan CTD

• Diagnostics > Color Management > Auto To


one Adjustment > Scan CTD

Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor.


poor

This function needs to be perfo


ormed after density of color is changed from
“Machine Setup > General Setttings > Color > Density Adjustment “ by
administrators.
Operation 1. Run Scan CTD
Procedure 2. Print out a test pattern. Notte that the test pattern is designed for A3 or ledger
size. Make sure that requir
q red media size is loaded in a tray. y
3. When the test pattern is priinted out, locate the pattern on the scanner.

4 Th
4. The arrow iin lleft
ft ttop off th
the test
t t pattern
tt need
d s tto h
head
d tto th
the lleft-top
ft t side
id off
scan glass and to be placed face down.
5. Run the pattern scanning by b pressing “OK” button.
6. Exit Scan CTD mode.
Verification Print out a test job and make su
ure the image quality has recovered.
Specification N/A

40
4-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 6 Service
4.6. S i F
Functions
ti

4.6.1. Main Memory Clear


• Service Functions > Main Memory Clear

This function resets the main memory of the system tto the factory default setting
setting. It can be used to reset
the system to the initial value when the product is fun
nctioning abnormally. All the user configured values
return to the default values.
To clear the main memory, users need to select the country
c of the system locates, and rebooting of the
system is required.

4.6.2. Hard Disk Maintenance


• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Device Configuration Data Clear

This function formats all device configuration data, fo


or example, user profile, address book, and devices
settings, on the hard disk

• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Temporary


T and Spool Data Clear
This function formats all temporary and spool data sa
aved on the hard disk.

• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > User


U Saved Data and Log Data Clear

This function formats all the user data, for example, box
b data, pending secure jobs, font, form, macro,
data related applications, and job log, on the hard dis
sk.

• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > All


A Saved Data Clear

This function formats all the data that can be erased with 3 functions above. The function will NOT format
the hard disk entirely.

• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Hard


H Disk Check

This function checks a bad sector in the hard disk. If a bad sector is found, the system will display an
error message and send an email notification to the ssystem administrator.
administrator

4.6.3. Debug Log


• Service Functions > Debug Log

This function sets the system log message level. Use


ers can select three options.

• Off : This option disables the logging option.


• Job Status: This option only enables the logging op ption of user created jobs.
• Details : This option enables all the logging optionss of the running tasks of the system. Note that this
option might create a trade-off of performance in cerrtain system operation. Use this option when the
system behaves abnormally, and engineers need to investigate
i problems.

41
4-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 6 4 Port
4.6.4.
• Service Functions > Port

This function enables/disables remote connections too the system via telnet, OSGI command shell, and
SMB(samba) protocol.
This function can be used when there is a problem that requires developers to access the system or
when there is a need for developers to upload appliccations for a test.
Since enabling those ports can creates a risk of damaging data stored in the device, agreement of the
administrator of the customer site is necessary. The user must log in as the administrator to
enable/disable the services.

4.6.5. Capture Log


• Service Functions > Capture Log

This function copies all the saved log in the system to


t a UBS memory as a zip file. To use this function,
a USB memory needs to be plugged into the system m. Note that the size of system log could reach up to
1GB. If the system log size become considerably hug ge, it will take longer time to copy to the plugged
memory.

4 6 6 Toner Save
4.6.6. S
• Service Functions > Toner Save

This function reduces the use of toner up to 30% and


d only applies to monochrome printing.

4 6 7 Count Setting of Large Pa


4.6.7. age
• Service Functions > Count Setting of Large Page
P

This function sets count of large page, such as A3 and ledger size, to 1 count or 2 count of the total
count. For example, the total use of 100 A4 impresssions and 100 A3 impressions will become 200
impressions if the configuration is set to “1 Count Up
p” while the total will be 300 impression if the
configuration is set to “2 Count Up”.

4.6.8. System Recovery


• Service Functions > System Recovery

em. To use this function, a HDD image need to be


This function repairs or format the HDD of the syste
saved in a USB memory
memory, and that USB memory need ds to be plugged in the system before the execution.
execution

From the system recovery UI, Choose “SYS” to reco over only the system partition of the HDD or “ALL”
to recover all the partition of the HDD.
When the system recovery UI is appeared after rebooot, choose “HDD Repair” to repair any corrupted
data in the selected partition or choose “HDD Forma
at” to format the data in the selected partition.
The password of this mode is 1934.

42
4-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 6 9 User Data Management


4.6.9.
• Service Functions > User Data Management

This function backup or restore user data stored in the


t hard disk. The purpose of this function is to
backup user data before format of the hard disk and d store back to the hard disk after format. Note that
hard dist format will be performed when the data en ncryption option is enabled by administrators.

To use this function users need to prepare a USB ha


ard disk that its size is larger than 100GB.

43
4-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4 6 10 TR C
4.6.10. Control Mode
• Service Functions > TR Control Mode

Purpose To correct transfer related proble


ems. This function can be used to change the
transfer value to optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.
Operation 1. TR Control Mode
Procedure • Choose the paper group, paaper side, and paper direction.
• Adjust PWM value based on n the problem type.
 Blur : Increase PWMM value
 Poor Transfer : Incre
ease PWM value
 Re-transfer : Decreaase PWM value
 White Spot : Decreaase PWM value
 OPC Cyclic Ghost : Decrease PWM value

Blur Poor Transfer Retransfer

White Spot OPC Cyclic Ghost

2 Bl
2. Blur U
Upgrade
d MModed :TTurn on the
th moded when
h black
bl k lines
li becomes
b blur.
bl
3. OHP Upgrade Mode : Turn on n the mode when transfer on OHP becomes poor.
Note that this option needs to be
e turned on only if there is a transfer problem in
OHP printing. Most of OHP types can be used without this option turned on.
Verification Print out a test job and make surre the transfer problem has resolved.
Specification N/A

44
4-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
4.Servic
ce Mode

4.6.11. Cool Down Mode


• Service Functions > Cool Down Mode

Purpose - If the problem is occurred at th


he side thermistor, fuser performs the cool down
mode to prevent abnormally ove erheating.

- User can set the stabilization ttime


Operation Enter the cool down mode and set the stabilization time.
Procedure - Off
- 30 sec
- 50 sec
- 70sec
Verification hether the cool down mode is performed.
Print the test page and verify wh
Specification N/A
Reference Default time of the cool down mode
m is 70 sec.
If the time sets under default, prroblems can occur at the fuser.

45
4-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

5 Updating
5. U d ti Firmware
Fi

This chapter includes instructions for updating the printer firmware.


You have to update the firmware after replacing the vid deo board or engine board or OPE board.
You can update the printer firmware by using one of th he following methods:

 Update the firmware by using the printer control pan


nel
 Update the firmware by using the network.

5-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

5.1 Updating from the Printe


er Control Panel
WARNING: Failure to follow these instructions could le ead to corruption issues and prevent the proper
operation of this printer. Follow all of the instructions carefully.
c

1. Download the firmware file from the Global Service P


1 Partner Network (GSPN) website
website.
2. Unzip the firmware file to a folder on your PC.
3. Copy the firmware file (*.hds) only to the root level of a USB flash drive.
Note: A3 firmware files may be up to 500 MB in size e. USB flash drive size must be a minimum of 2GB.
4. Plug the USB flash drive into one of the two front USB ports (located below the control panel).
5 . Once the machine successfully accesses the USB drive, d the USB button will be enabled on the Home
Screen. Press the [Machine Setup] button.

6. On the Machine Setup screen, press the [Applicatio


on Management] button.

5-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

7. Enter an Administrator ID and Password, and then press


p the [OK] button.
Note: The default Administrator ID and Passwordd was created when the machine was first installed.

8. On the Application tab, press the Install button.

5-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

9. The Installation window will list the files on the USB drive.
d Touch the name of the firmware file to select it,
and then press the [OK] button.
Note: Firmware file format type is *.hds or *.parr

10. The machine will analyze the firmware file to ensuree the file is not corrupt and that it is the correct file for
the machine. Wait for analysis to finish. The proc
cess will take a few minutes.

5-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

ow displays. Press the OK button to begin the firmware


11. Once analysis is complete, the Validation Info windo
upgrade process

Validation Info

Item Description
Firmware Machine component to be updated
Version Comparison of the firmware upgrade file
f version and the installed firmware
Upper = Higher level firmware version
Lower = Lower level firmware version
Same = Same firmware version

Model Check of firmware file model and mac


chine model
Matched = File model and machine modell are correct
Unmatched = File model and machine model are not correct

State Upgrade status


Updatable = Component will be upgraded
Same version installed = Component will not
n be upgraded

Overwrite Allows a technician to override upgrad


de logic and force the machine to install the firmware file
on the USB drive regardless of version

5-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

12. Once the firmware upgrade process begins, the F/W


W Update Progress window will display. This window
displays the current progress and time remaining. Wait for the firmware upgrade process to complete.

Note: Depending on the firmware file size, the gen


neral upgrade process may take about 10~15 minutes
to complete. However, the full upgrade process may take up to 25 minutes to complete. Do not turn off
the power while the firmware is being updated.

13. Once the firmware upgrade process is complete, thee F/W Update Result window will display. This window
displays the results of the firmware upgrade, and indicates that the firmware process completed
successfully Press the Close button.
successfully. button The machine will reboot completing the firmware upgrade process.
process

14. Press [[Machine Setup]>


p] [Machine
[ Details]] > [Softw
[ ware Versions],
] If you
y wish to check your
y firmware
version.

5-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

52U
5.2 Updating
d ti ffrom th
the N
Netwo
t ork
k
WARNING: Failure to follow these instructions could lead to corruption issues and prevent the proper
s carefully.
operation of this printer. Follow all of the instructions

Perform the following procedure to update the printerr firmware from the network.

1. Go to the SyncThru Web Service (SWS) main hom


me page, clicks the [Maintenance].

2. On the left menu tab, click [Application Managemeent]. You must check or print out the current firmware
versions of each unit and software
software. You should com
mpare the version after the firmware update is
finished.

5-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

3. For firmware updating , click [login] to access as default


d administrator as shown in the picture below.
See 5-2 page “Login as Administrator” for adminis strator’s password and other information.

4. Go to [Maintenance] and [Application Managemen


nt], Click the [Add] button for installing applications.

5-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

5. Choose installation file by browsing file system.

6. If the PAR file is valid, the MFP device will displayy the PAR package details.

[Version] shows compare result with currently installe


ed version.

[Model] indicates whether firmware model is matched with the MFP device.

[N: Same Version] means the device will not update firmware because it has already same version.

[N: Option] means the MFP device will not update firmware because option is not equipped
equipped.

[N: System] means the MFP device will not update firmware because model is unmatched to MFP device.

[Y: Updatable] means the MFP device is ready to up


pdate firmware.

※ For updating firmware, even if firmware is same version


v or unmatched model, check [Overwrite] box.

5-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
5.Updating
g Firmware

7. Press the [OK] button to start update. The MFP de


evice will attempt to install the PAR file by providing
status messages.

8. Once the installation is complete, the MFP device will provide final result.

9. Once the installation is complete, MFP device pow wer-off and power-on automatically. In normal case,
Fi
Firmware update
d t takes
t k around d 10
10~15
15 min.
i A And,
d fu
fullll sett firmware
fi takes
t k around
d 30 min
i att maximum.
i

5-1
10
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6 Preventive
6. P ti Maintena
M i t ance (PM)

This chapter includes instructions and examples you can


c use to perform preventative maintenance tasks
on the printer.

Some of the printer’s parts have shorter life spans tha


an other printer hardware. Preventive maintenance
(PM) allows you to maintain the functionality of the priinter by periodically inspecting and cleaning the
hardware and by replacing parts that have reached their useable limit.

PM kits packaged for each unit or group of parts with the same replacement number of output pages,
allows you to carry out efficient parts replacement.

To extend the life of equipment, overhauling is require


ed when a specified number of pages have been
printed or when a specified
p p p
period of time has p
passed d, regardless
g of the number of output
p pages.
p g

6 1 PM Supplies
6.1 S li
This section contains information about PM supplies and
a PM schedules. PM Supplies include the following:

 PM Parts
 PM Kits

6.1.1 PM Parts

The following tables contain the names of the PM parts


s and the scheduled time for cleaning (C) or replacing
(R).

Toner cartridge

Part code 20K 35K

MLT-K606S
High Yield Toner cartridge R
(Korea/USA only)

Standard Yield Toner cartridge MLT-K607S R

6-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

Imaging unit
Part code 50K 100K 150K 200K 250K 300K

Imaging Unit MLT-R607K R R R

Charge scorotron - C C C C C C

Toner pipe surrounding - C C C

Waste Toner Container


Part code 50K 100K 150K 200K 250K 300K
Waste Toner Container MLT-W606 C C R
WTB surrounding - C C C

Paper Path
Part code 50K 100K 150K 200K
Pick Up Roller
JC93-00540A C C C R
(Tray 1,2, DCF, HCF)
Retard
R t dRRoller
ll
JC93-00540A C C C R
(Tray 1,2, DCF, HCF)
Forward Roller
JC93-00540A C C C R
(Tray 1,2, DCF, HCF)
MP Pick Up Roller JC90-00540A C C R C
MP Retard Roller JC90-00540A C C R C
MP Forward Roller JC90-00540A C C R C
Paper Dust Remover JC93-00078B C C C C
Registration Roller JC66-03893A C C C C
Feed Roller JC66-02312A C C C C
Transport route,Guide - C C C C
Sensor - C C C C

6-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

DADF
Part code 75K 150K 225K 300K
DADF Pick-up Roller Assy JC97-04009A C C R C
DADF Friction Pad JC97-04243A C C R C

Fuser Unit
Part code 50K 100K 150K 200K 250K 300K

Fuser Unit (110V) JC91-01143A R R

Fuser Unit (220V) JC91-01144A R R

Transfer Roller Unit


Part code 50K 100K 150K 200K 250K 300K

Transfer Roller Unit JC95-01134A R R

Frame
Part code 50K 100K 150K 200K 250K 300K

Ozone Filter JC29-00002A C C R C C R

6-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.1.2 8030/8040 & 8230/8240 Parts Co


ompatibility

Some unit and option of SCX-8230/8240 are compatibble with SCX-8030/8040's.


You have to check the compatibility when you change
e the following unit and option.

Consumables and Maintenance Parts

6-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6 2 PM Procedures
6.2 P d

This section contains the procedures you use to perforrm preventative maintenance on the printer.

6.2.1 Toner cartridge

1. Open the front door. 2. Pull the toner cartridge out from the machine.

6-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

3. Remove the new toner cartridge from the its bag. 6. Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the slot
inside the machine. Insert it back into its slot until
locks in place.

4. Carefully pull the seal tape out of the toner


cartridge.

7. Close the front door. Ensure that the door is


securely closed.
5. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to
distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.

NOTE – If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off


with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot
water sets toner into fabric.

NOTE – If the front door is not completely closed,


th machine
the hi will ill nott operate.
t

6-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6 2 2 IImaging
6.2.2 i unit
i

1. Open the front door. 3. Open the right door.

2. Lift the locking lever upward. Then remove the 4. Pull the imaging unit out from the machine.
waste toner container.

6-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

5. Remove the new imaging unit from its package. 7. Remove the tape.

CAUTION
Do not use sharp objects, such as a knife or
scissors, to open the imaging unit package. You
could damage the surface of the imaging unit.

6. Pull out the OPC protecting pad. 8. Pull out the stopper.

NOTE
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry
cloth and wash clothing in cold water
water. Hot water
sets toner into fabric.

CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging
unit.
To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit
to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a
piece of paper to protect it if necessary
necessary.

6-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

9. Remove the paper protecting the surface of the 11. Close the right door.
imaging unit.

10. Hold the handles on the new imaging unit, and 12. Insert the waste toner container until it locks in
push the imaging unit until it locks into place. place.

6-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

13. Close the front door. Ensure that the door is securrely closed.

NOTE
O
e will not operate.
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine

6-1
10
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.2.3 Transfer roller Unit

1. Open the Cover-Side to remove the 2nd


transfer roller [A].

[A]

2. Pull both holders in the direction of the arrows.


And lift up the transfer roller unit.

CAUTION
Please don’t touch the surface of the transfer
roller.

6-1
11
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.2.4 Fuser unit

CAUTION
The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fuser unit. When replacing it, you may get burned. Before
replacing it, make sure that fuser unit has cooled.

1. Open the Cover-Side.

2. Remove 4 screws from the left/right.


3. Remove the fuser unit by holding the
[A] handles [A].

6-1
12
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.2.5 Pick up / Retard / Forward roller


1. Open the Side-Cover.
2. Remove the Cassette.
3. Lift small tap, remove the pick up /retard/
forward roller.

NOTE
When replacing the pick up roller, it is
recommended that you replace all three rollers
at the same time.

CAUTION
Be careful not to hurt yourself by the drawer
rail.

6.2.6 Ozone filter

1. Squeeze the retainer clips holding the


Ozone Filter.
2. Pull to remove the Ozone Filter from the left
side of the printer.

6-1
13
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.2.7 DADF Pick-up roller Assy

1. Open the DADF-open cover. 3. Remove the DADF Pick-up roller Assy after
2. Remove the spring. g 2 hooks.
releasing

6.2.8 DADF friction pad


p

1. Open the DADF-open cover.


2. Remove the DADF friction pad.

6-1
14
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.2.9 MP Pick up / Retard / Forward ro


oller

1. Open the MP Tray.

2. Remove the Front Cover [A].

[A]

3. Remove the pick up roller.

NOTE
When replacing pick up roller, Samsung
recommands that three rollers should be
replaced at once.

6-1
15
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

4. Open the Cover-Side.

5. Remove the Screw.


6. Remove the Guide Lower A’ssy [B].

[B]

7. Remove the Retard / Forward roller.

NOTE
When replacing pick up roller, Samsung
recommands that three rollers should be
replaced at once.

6-1
16
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6 2 10 Scanner
6.2.10 S Fan
F Filter
Fil

1. Unbolt the screw that assembles the scanner fan 5. Attach new scanner fan filter to the scanner
cover. fan cover.
2. Separate the scanner fan cover from the copier.

6. Assemble the scanner fan cover into the


copier.

3. Remove the old scanner fan filter from scanner


fan cover.

4. Remove the released paper from new scanner


fan filter.

6-1
17
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6 3 Cleaning the PM parts


6.3

NOTE
The cleaning alcohol is the Isopropyl alcohol.

6.3.1 Cleaning the charge scorotron

1. Open the front cover.


2. Remove the waste toner box.
3. Slowly pull out and push the cleaning tool [A].
[A] 4 R
4. Repeatt step
t 3 att lleastt 5 titimes.

6.3.2 Cleaning the pick up roller

1. Clean the pick up roller which was removed


from the pick up unit using a micro fiber cloth.
(Refer to 6.2.5)

6-1
18
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.3.3 Cleaning the Regi roller

1. Open the Cover-Side


2. Clean the regi roller[A] by using a cleaning
pad with alcohol.

[A]

6.3.4 Cleaning the tray1 feed roller

1. Open the Cover-Side


2. Clean the Tray1 Feed roller[A] by using a
cleaning pad with alcohol.

[A]

6-1
19
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.3.5 Cleaning the tray2 feed roller

1. Open the Cover-Side.


2. Open the Tray2 rear cover [A].

[A]

3. Clean the Tray2 Feed roller [B] by using a


cleaning pad with alcohol.

[B]

6-2
20
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.3.6 Cleaning the ADF glass

1. Open the DADF unit.


2. Wipe away paper dirt and spot on ADF glass
with micro fiber cloth.

3 S
3. Squeeze smallll amountt off
COATING-GLASS[A] to micro fiber cloth.

[A] CAUTION
Please don’t squeeze much amount of
COATING-GLASS.
If too much COATING-GLASS is used,
too much drying time is needed
needed.

4. Spread the COATING-GLASS evenly


on ADF glass, especially on the smudge
or spot.
5. Rub surface of ADF glass until all stain is
removed.

6-2
21
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
6. Preventive Maintenance

6.3.7 Cleaning the feed sensor

Note
The feed sensor contamination may make the jam m error.
Pl
Please clean
l th
the ffeed
d sensor reqularly.
l l (Approx.
(A 150K)

[ Contaminated Sensor]

1. Open the side cover.


2. Clean the sensor with the soft cloth or cotton swab.

6-2
22
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7 Troubleshooting
7.

7.1 Procedure for checking symptoms

This chapter describes how to troubleshooting the prrinter. Troubleshooting is explained using two
approaches:

■ A step-by-step verification procedure that system matically confirms that particular components of the
printer are properly functioning until a problem is found.

■ An error code detail table shows the error codes,, their possible causes, and troubleshooting.

7.1.1 System power-up sequence

The following
g lists the chain of events that occur when
nyyou turn on the printer.
p
You can follow this list as one means of determining whether
w the printer is operating correctly.
When the power switch is turned on, these events occ cur:

. The engine control board checks its RAM.


. All the engine fans are turned on to ensure they worrk properly.
. The fuser heater (a halogen lamp) is activated to he eat up the heated roller.
. The position of each toner cartridge is checked to ensure they are in their parked positions.
. A print engine checks to see that the imaging unit unit, the paper feeder and the transfer unit are
installed.
. The engine motors are rotated to ensure that their ro otation sensors are detected.
. The transparency film sensor and the image density y sensors are “tuned” for the amount of infrared light
they each emit.
. A check is made to determine whether any paper is jammed in the printer.
. The print engine checks the level of toner in each to oner cartridge.
. After the fuser reaches its idle temperature, a color correction cycle is performed.
. The printer is placed on line in its READY state
state.
. The print engine is initialized. If the startup page fea ature has not been disabled and no error occurred
with the printer, the printer prints a startup page.

7--1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.1.2 Pre-troubleshooting check list

Environment

1.Check if the machine is installed on a solid, LEVELEED surface.


2.Check if the machine is exposed to direct sunlight.
3.Check if the power supply plug inserted in the product and directly to the wall outlet.
4.Check if the power supply voltage within ± 10 volts of
o the specified power source.

Media

1.Check if the media is supported within specifications s.


2.Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software
application settings you use.
use
3.Check if the media is curled, folded.

Component

1.Check if the toner cartridges and imaging units are innstalled correctly.
2.Check if the Fuser unit and cartridge transfer unit are
e installed correctly.
3.Check if the front cover and side cover are closed.

7--2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7 2 Error
7.2 E code
d and
dTTroubles
bl shooting
h ti

7.2.1 Error code and error message

ERROR CODE ERROR MES


SSAGE PAGE

A1-1113 Motor Failure: #A1-1113. Turn off then on. Call forr service if the problem persists 7-A- 1

A1-1211 Motor Failure: #A1-1211. Turn off then on. Call forr service if the problem persists 7-A- 3

A1-1213 Motor Failure: #A1-1213. Turn off then on. Call forr service if the problem persists 7-A- 3

A1-2111 Motor Failure: #A1-2111. Turn off then on. Call forr service if the problem persists 7-A- 5

A1-2113 Motor Failure: #A1-2113. Turn off then on. Call forr service if the problem persists 7-A- 5

A1-5113 Motor Failure: #A1-5113. Turn off then on. Call forr service if the problem persists 7-A- 7

A2-1410 Fan Failure: #A2-1410. Turn off then on. Call for se
ervice if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A2-1411 Fan Failure: #A2-1411. Turn off then on. Call for se
ervice if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A2-1510 Fan Failure: #A2-1510. Turn off then on. Call for se
ervice if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A2-1511 Fan Failure: #A2-1511. Turn off then on. Call for se
ervice if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A2-2310 Fan Failure: #A2-2310. Turn off then on. Call for se
ervice if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A2-2311 Fan Failure: #A2-2311. Turn off then on. Call for se
ervice if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A2-2810 Fan Failure: #A2-2810. Turn off then on. Call for se
ervice if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A2-2811 Fan Failure: #A2-2811. Turn off then on. Call for se
ervice if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A2-2920 Fan Failure: #A2-2920. Open the door, then close it. Call for service if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A2-2921 Fan Failure: #A2-2921. Open the door, then close it. Call for service if the problem persists 7-A- 9

A3-2210 ID control has failed. Check the CTD sensor(A3-2210) 7-A- 11

A3-3111 or service if the problem persists


Sensor Failure: #A3-3111. Turn off then on. Call fo 7-A- 12

A3-3112 Sensor Failure: #A3-3112. Turn off then on. Call fo


or service if the problem persists 7-A- 12

A3-3113 Sensor Failure: #A3-3113. Turn off then on. Call fo


or service if the problem persists 7-A- 12

A3 3114
A3-3114 S
Sensor FFailure:
il #A3
#A3-3114.
3114 Turn
T off
ff then
h on. Call
C ll ffo
or service
i if the
h problem
bl persists
i 7 A 12
7-A-

A3-3311 Sensor Failure: #A3-3311. Turn off then on. Call fo


or service if the problem persists 7-A- 13

A3-3312 Sensor Failure: #A3-3312. Turn off then on. Call fo


or service if the problem persists 7-A- 13

A3-3411 Sensor Failure: #A3-3411. Turn off then on. Call fo


or service if the problem persists 7-A- 13

A3-3412 Sensor Failure: #A3-3412.


#A3-3412 Turn off then on.
on Call fo
or service if the problem persists 7-A- 13

7--3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

ERROR CODE ERROR MES


SSAGE PAGE

C1-1110 Prepare new toner cartridge 7-C- 1

C1-1130 Replace with new toner cartridge 7-C- 2

C1-1140 End of life, Replace with new toner cartridge 7-C- 2

C1 1311
C1-1311 T
Toner Cartridge
C t id Failure:
F il #C1-1311.
#C1 1311 Install
I t ll toner
t cartridge
t id again
i 7 C 3
7-C-

C1-1411 Toner cartridge is not installed. Install the cartridge 7-C- 4

C1-1512 Toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide 7-C- 5

C3-1110 Prepare new imaging unit 7-C- 6

C3-1130
C3 1130 Replace with new imaging unit 7-C-
7 C 6

C3-1140 End of life, Replace with new imaging unit 7-C- 6

C3-1211 Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-1211. Please turn off the


en on 7-C- 7

C3-1312 Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-1312. Install imaging un


nit again 7-C- 7

C3-1411 Imaging unit is not installed. Install the unit 7-C- 8

C3-1422 Imaging uint requires chargers cleaning. Clean the


e unit. 7-C- 9

C3-1512 Imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide


e 7-C- 10

C6-1110 Prepare new fuser unit 7-C- 11

C6-1120 Replace with new fuser unit 7-C- 11

C6-1311 Fuser unit is not installed correctly. Install it. 7-C- 12

C7-1110 Waste toner container is almost full. Order new on


ne 7-C- 13

C7-1130 Waste toner container is full. Replace it 7-C- 13

C7-1311 Waste toner container is not installed. Install it 7-C- 14

H1-1311 Paper jam in Tray 3 7-H- 1

H1-1312 Paper jam in Tray 3 7-H- 2

H1-1317 Paper jam in Tray 3 7-H- 3

H1-1318 Paper jam in Tray 3 7-H- 3

H1-1411 Paper jam in Tray 4 7-H- 4

H1-1412 Paper jam in Tray 4 7-H- 5

H1-1417 Paper jam in Tray 4 7-H- 6

H1-1418 Paper jam in Tray 4 7-H- 6

7--4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

ERROR CODE ERROR MES


SSAGE PAGE

H1-1311 Paper jam in Tray 3 7-H- 1

H1-1312 Paper jam in Tray 3 7-H- 2

H1-1317 Paper jam in Tray 3 7-H- 3

H1 1318
H1-1318 P
Paper jam
j in
i TTray 3 7 H 3
7-H-

H1-1411 Paper jam in Tray 4 7-H- 4

H1-1412 Paper jam in Tray 4 7-H- 5

H1-1417 Paper jam in Tray 4 7-H- 6

H1-1418
H1 1418 Paper jam in Tray 4 7-H-
7 H 6

H2-2001 Paper jam at exit of finisher bridge. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2002 Paper jam inside of finisher. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2003 Paper jam inside of finisher. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2005 Paper jam at entrance of finisher bridge. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2008 Paper jam at entrance of finisher. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2009 Paper jam at exit of finisher. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2010 Paper jam at exit of finisher. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2012 Paper jam inside of finisher bridge. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2014 Paper jam around puncher of finisher. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2129 Finisher Error #H2-2129. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2193 Finisher Error #H2-2193. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2257 Finisher Error #H2-2257. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2322 Finisher Error #H2-2322. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2386 Finisher Error #H2-2386. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2449 Finisher Error #H2-2449. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2453 Finisher Error #H2-2453. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2463 Finisher Error #H2-2463. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2513 Finisher Error #H2-2513. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2522 Finisher Error #H2-2522. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2577 Finisher Error #H2-2577. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

7--5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

ERROR CODE ERROR MES


SSAGE PAGE

H2-2581 Finisher Error #H2-2581. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2589 Finisher Error #H2-2589. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2705 Finisher Error #H2-2705. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2 2713
H2-2713 Fi i h Error
Finisher E #H2-2713.
#H2 2713 Turn
T off
ff th
then on. R f tto Finisher
Refer Fi i h SM

H2-2775 Finisher Error #H2-2775. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2778 Finisher Error #H2-2778. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2779 Finisher Error #H2-2779. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

Finisher door is open. Close it


H2-2A20
H2 2A20 Refer to Finisher SM
(Display animation)

H2-2A32 The paper in finisher stacker is full. Remove printe


ed paper Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2A52 Hole punch hopper is full or not installed. Remove


e waste of hopper or install hopper. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2A61 Finisher staple cartridge is not installed. Install it. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2A62 Finisher staple cartridge is low. Prepare it Refer to Finisher SM

H2-2A63 Finisher staple cartridge is empty. Replace it. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3002 Paper jam at entrance of booklet maker. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3005 Paper jam inside of booklet maker. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3007 Paper jam before booklet folding. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3257 Booklet maker Error #H2-3257. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3321 Booklet maker Error #H2-3321. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3385 Booklet maker Error #H2-3385. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3449 Booklet maker Error #H2-3449. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3578 Booklet maker Error #H2-3578. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3641 Booklet maker Error #H2-3641. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3705 Booklet maker Error #H2-3705. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3769 Booklet maker Error #H2-3769. Turn off then on. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3A32 The paper in Booklet stacker is full. Remove printe


ed paper Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3A61 Booklet staple cartridge is not installed. Install it. Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3A62 Booklet staple cartridge is low. Prepare it Refer to Finisher SM

H2-3A63 Booklet staple cartridge is empty. Replace it. Refer to Finisher SM

7--6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

ERROR MES
SSAGE PAGE

M1-1113 Paper jam in Tray 1 7-M- 1

M1-1213 Paper jam in Tray 2 7-M- 2

M1-1610 Paper jam in MP Tray 7-M- 3

M2 1121
M2-1121 P
Paper jam
j in
i TTray 1 7 M 4
7-M-

M2-1124 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 4

M2-1125 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 4

M2-1131 Paper jam in Tray 2 7-M- 4

M2-1134
M2 1134 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M-
7 M 4

M2-1135 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 4

M2-1211 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 5

M2-1213 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 5

M2-1214 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 5

M2-1321 Paper jam inside of machine. 7-M- 6

M2-1324 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 6

M2-1325 Paper jam inside of machine. 7-M- 6

M2-1331 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 7

M2-1333 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 7

M2-1334 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 7

M2-2111 Paper jam inside of machine 7-M- 8

M2-2113 Paper jam at the top of duplex path 7-M- 8

M2-2114 Paper jam at the top of duplex path 7-M- 8

M2-2213 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path 7-M- 9

M2-2215 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path 7-M- 9

M2-2216 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path 7-M- 9

M2-2411 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path 7-M- 10

M2-2413 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path 7-M- 10

M2-2414 Paper jam at the return of duplex path (display Graphical


G help) 7-M- 10

M3-1211 Paper jam in exit area 7-M- 11

7--7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

ERROR CODE ERROR MES


SSAGE PAGE

M3-1211 Paper jam in exit area 7-M-11

M3-1213 Paper jam in exit area 7-M-11

M3-1214 Paper jam in exit area 7-M-11

M3 2230
M3-2230 O t t tray(face
Output t (f down)
d ) is
i full.
f ll Remove
R printed
i t d me
edia
di 7 M 12
7-M-12

S1-2411 HDD System Failure: #S1-2411. Turn off then on 7-S-1

S1-2433 System Failure: #S1-2433 . Call for service 7-S-2

S1-2434 HDD Error #S1-2434. Check users guide 7-S-3

S1-2435
S1 2435 HDD Error #S1
#S1-2435
2435. Check users guide 7 S 3
7-S-3

S1-2436 HDD Error #S1-2436. Check users guide 7-S-3

S1-2437 HDD Error #S1-2437. Check users guide 7-S-3

S1-2438 HDD Error #S1-2438. Check users guide 7-S-3

S1-2439 HDD Error #S1-2439. Check users guide 7-S-3

S1-2443 HDD System Failure #S1-2443 : Call for service 7-S-2

S1-2444 HDD System Failure #S1-2444 : Call for service 7-S-2

S1-2445 HDD System Failure #S1-2445 : Call for service 7-S-2

S1-2446 HDD System Failure #S1-2446 : Call for service 7-S-2

S1-2447 HDD System Failure #S1-2447 : Call for service 7-S-2

S1-2448 HDD System Failure #S1-2448 : Call for service 7-S-2

S1-2449 HDD System Failure #S1-2449 : Call for service 7-S-2

S1-2511 MSOK System Failure: #S1-2511. Turn off then on 7-S-4

S1-2523 PPM data is incorrect. Call for service & change MSOK
M 7-S-4

S1-2540 MSOK Failure: #S1-2540. Call for service & change


e MSOK 7-S-4

S2-1211 Engine System Failure: #S2-1211. Turn off then on


n 7-S-6

S2-2311 Engine System Failure: #S2-2311. Turn off then on


n 7-S-6

S2-3110 Engine System Failure: #S2-3110. Turn off then on


n 7-S-6

S2-4210 Front door is open. Close it 7-S-7

S2-4410 Right door is open. Close it 7-S-7

S2-4A10 Feed door is opened. Close it. 7-S-7

7--8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

ERROR CODE ERROR MES


SSAGE PAGE

S3-3111 Scan System Failure: #S3-3111. Turn off then on 7-S- 8

S3-3121 Scanner locked or another problem occurred.(No Switch


S Case)Scanner is locked 7-S- 9

S3-3211 Scan System Failure: #S3-3211. Turn off then on 7-S- 10

S5 3131
S5-3131 UI System
S t FFailure
il 7 S 11
7-S-

S6-3122 Network cable is disconnected. Check it 7-S- 12

S6-3123 This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it 7-S- 13

U1-2114 Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2114. Turn off then on 7-U- 1

U1-2115
U1 2115 Fuser Unit Failure: #U1
#U1-2115
2115. Turn off then on
on. Call for service if the problem persists 7-U-
7 U 3

U1-2119 Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2119. Turn off then on 7-U- 1

U1-2131 Fuser Unit Failure #U1-2131: Turn off then on. 7-U- 4

U1-2132 Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2132. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists 7-U- 6

U1-2134 Fuser Unit Failure #U1-2134: Turn off then on. 7-U- 4

U1-2135 Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2135. Turn off then on 7-U- 6

U1-2141 Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2141. Turn off then on 7-U- 8

U1-2142 Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2142. Turn off then on 7-U- 8

U2-1111 ervice if the problem persists


LSU Failure: #U2-1111.Turn off then on. Call for se 7-U- 9

U2-1113 LSU Failure: #U2-1113.Turn off then on. Call for se


ervice if the problem persists 7-U- 10

U2-1114 LSU Failure: #U2-1114. Turn off then on 7-U- 9

U3-3212 Original paper jam in front of the scanner 7-U- 11

U3-3213 Original paper jam inside the scanner 7-U- 11

U3-3214 Original paper jam inside the scanner 7-U- 11

U3-3312 Original paper jam inside the scanner 7-U- 12

U3-3313 Original paper jam inside the scanner 7-U- 12

U3-3314 Original paper jam inside the scanner 7-U- 12

U3-3413 Original paper jam inside the scanner 7-U- 13

U3-3414 Original paper jam inside the scanner 7-U- 13

U3-3513 Original paper jam inside the scanner 7-U- 14

U3-3514 Original paper jam inside the scanner 7-U- 14

7--9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

ERROR CODE ERROR MES


SSAGE PAGE

U3-3611 Original paper jam in the exit area of scanner 7-U- 15

U3-3612 Original paper jam in the exit area of scanner 7-U- 15

U3-3613 Original paper jam in the exit area of scanner 7-U- 15

U3 4210
U3-4210 T
Top door
d off scanner iis open 7 U 16
7-U-

7-1
10
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

7.2.2 Troubleshooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


A1-1113 Actuator Motor Failure #A1-1113: Turn off then on.

● Symptom
S t /C
Cause :

Main BLDC motor does not operate.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Turn off the machine then turn on.

2. If the problem persists, check whether foreign substtances are near Regi-roller and MP. If there are
some debris, clean it.

3. Remove Rear-cover.

4. Check if the main drive motor connector is correctly connected.

(Refer to 3.8.1. Main drive motor)

M
Main BLDC (MP/REGI/DUPLEX)

5 If th
5. the problem
bl persists,
i t replace
l M i drive
Main d i motor(J
t (JJC93 00123B)
JC93-00123B).

7-A
A-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Troubleshooting
T bl h ti method
th d :

6. If there is no problem, turn the machine on.

7. Check whether the motor moves by SVC mode.

st Routines > 100-0250)


(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Tes

a. If th
the motor
t does
d nott operate
t

1) Check the signals and voltage by DVM.

(Refer to 8. System Diagram)

2) If output signal is normal, replace MOTOR-BLD


DC(JC32-00123B).

3) If not,

a) 24V power supply is not generated : replace SM


MPS(JC44-00100C)

b) A output signal is not normal :

replace MAIN BOARD(8240 : JC92-02587A / 8230


8 : JC92-02587B)

5V 24V
GND
b. If the motor operates,

a) Check the connections between BLDC motor and Main board.

b) If there are some problems at 8 pin connector, replace


r MAIN BOARD(8240 : JC92-02587A / 8230 :
JC92-02587B) .

7-A
A-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
A1-1211 Actuator Motor Failure #A1-1211: Turn off then on.
A1-1213 Actuator Motor Failure #A1-1213: Turn off then on.

● Symptom / Cause :

Fuser motor does not operate.


operate
Fuser motor works but recognizes it with halt status.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Turn off the machine then turn on.

2 If the problem persists,


2. persists check whether foreign substtances are near Fuser
Fuser. If there are some debris
debris,
clean it.

3. Remove Rear-cover.

orrectly.
4. Check if the Fuser motor connector is connected co

(Refer to 3.9 Exit drive unit)

7-A
A-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Troubleshooting
T bl h ti method
th d :

5. If there is no problem, turn the machine on.

6. Check whether the motor moves by SVC mode.

(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Testt Routines > 100-0440)

a. If th
the motor
t does
d nott operate
t

1) Check the signals and voltage by DVM.

(Refer to 8. System Diagram)

2) If output signal is normal, replace MOTOR-BLD


DC(JC32-00123B).

3) If not,

a) 24V power supply is not generated : replace SM


MPS(JC44-00100C)

b) A output signal is not normal :

replace MAIN BOARD(8240 : JC92-02587A / 8230


8 : JC92-02587B)

5V 24V
GND
b. If the motor operates,

a) Check the connections between BLDC motor and Main board.

b) If there are some problems at 8 pin connector, replace


r MAIN BOARD(8240 : JC92-02587A / 8230 :
JC92-02587B) .

7-A
A-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


A1-2111 Actuator Motor Failure #A1-2111: Call for service if the problem persists.
A1-2113 Actuator Motor Failure #A1-2113: Call for service if the problem persists.

● Symptom / Cause :

OPC motor does not operate.


OPC motor works but recognizes it with half status.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Turn off the machine then turn on.

2. If the problem persists, check whether foreign substtances are near OPC. If there are some debris, clean
it.

3. Remove Rear-cover.

4. Check if the OPC motor connector is connected corrrectly.

(Refer to 3.8.1. Main drive motor)

BLDC
C (OPC/DEVE)

7-A
A-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Troubleshooting
T bl h ti method
th d :

5. If there is no problem, turn the machine on.

6. Check whether the motor moves by SVC mode.

(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Testt Routines > 100-0300)

a. If th
the motor
t does
d nott operate
t

1) Check the signals and voltage by DVM.

(Refer to 8. System Diagram)

2) If output signal is normal, replace MOTOR-BLD


DC(JC32-00123B).

3) If not,

a) 24V power supply is not generated : replace SM


MPS(JC44-00100C)

b) A output signal is not normal :

replace MAIN BOARD(8240 : JC92-02587A / 8230


8 : JC92-02587B)

5V 24V
GND
b. If the motor operates,

a) Check the connections between BLDC motor and Main board.

b) If there are some problems at 8 pin connector, replace


r MAIN BOARD(8240 : JC92-02587A / 8230 :
JC92-02587B) .

7-A
A-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


A1-5113 Motor Failure: #A1-5
5513. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem
persists

● Symptom / Cause :

1. Toner motor is broken.


2. The relative connectors are disconnected.
3. Deve joint board and main board are defective.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Print a Supply information. If the total pages of Tone


er cartridge is under 1,000, take off Toner cartridge.
Check whether the seal is not removed.

2. Open Front-cover and check if the toner supply system is defective.

3. Check if the Toner prevention stopper is removed.

4. Turn off then on.

5. If the problem persists, Check whether the Toner Supply motor operates by SVC mode.

(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Tes


st Routines > 100-0410)

6. If the motor does not operate, check the signals and


d voltage by DVM.

(Voltage of red wire is 0V and black wire is 24V.)

7-A
A-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Troubleshooting method :

7. If a output signal is normal, replace MOTOR-BLDC


C(JC32-00123B).

8 If not,
8. t

a. 24V power supply is not generated : replace SMPS


S(JC44-00100C)

b. A Output signal is not normal :

30 : JC92-02587B)
replace MAIN BOARD(8240 : JC92-02587A / 823

5V 24V
GND

7-A
A-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


A2-1410 / 1411 Fan Failure: #A2-xxxx. Turn
n off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
A2-1510 / 1511 Fan Failure: #A2-xxxx. Openn the door, then close it. Call for service if the
A2-1521 / 1523 problem persists
A2-2310 / 2311
A2-2810 / 2811
A2-2821 / 2823
A2-2920 / 2921
● Symptom / Cause :

Fan operates abnormally.

● Troubleshooting method :

1
3
2

4
5
1. A2-1510/1511/1521/1523 : Duplex Fan
2. A2-2310 / A2-2311 : FUSER Fan
3. A2-1410
3 0 / A2-1411 : S
SMPS
S In Fan
4. A2-2810/2811/2821/2823 : Ozone Fan
5. A2-2920/2921 : OPC Fan
1. Turn the machine off then on. If the problem persists
s, turn off.

2. Check if the Fan connectors is connected correctly.

e.
3. Check whether the related fan works by SVC mode
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Tes
st Routines)
122-0110 SMPS in fan run
122-0100 Fuser out fan run
122-0010 Duplex fan1 run
122-0140 Ozone suction fan run

7-A
A-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Troubleshooting method :

4. If the fan does not operate, measure the input voltag


ge of fan by DVM. (check the red wire.)

Fan Part Code

Duplex Fan JC31-00161A

FUSER Fan JC31-00161A

SMPS In Fan JC31-00160B

OZONE Fan JC31-00130B

a. If 24V is supplied, replace the defective fan. OPC Fan JC31-00127A


b. If not,
- Measure the voltage of SMPS. If the voltage is not 24V, replace SMPS(JC44-00100A(220V) / JC44-
00093A(110V)).

5V 24V
GND
- If SMPS is normal, replace Main Board(JC92-0258
87A(40), JC92-02587B(30)).

5. Fan works but the error persists,

a. Check yellow wire's voltage by DVM.

.
Fan Lock Signal Connect Disconnect

Work 0V 3.3 V

Stop 3.3 V 3.3 V

b. Check fan operation as connection or disconnection


n.

1) When fan is disconnected, if the Lock signal is 0V


V continually, check the harness.

2) If harness has no problem, Main Board(.JC92-0


02587A(40), JC92-02587B(30)).

3 If the signal value is different from the table above


e, replace FAN.

7-A--10
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


A3-2210 Sensor Failure: Turn
n off then on. Call for service if the problem persists.

● Symptom / Cause :

CTD sensor is defective.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Check if the Imaging unit motor works properly. If the motor is defective, replace Main drive
motor(JC93-00123B).

(Refer to 3.8.1 Main drive motor)

2. Check the TC value by SVC mode.

(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Tes


st Routines > 111-5030)

3. If the TC value is between 80 to 120, replace Imagiing unit(MLT-R607K).

7-A--11
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


A3-3111 Sensor Failure: Turn
n off then on. Call for service if the problem persists.
A3-3112
A3-3113
A3-3114

● Symptom / Cause :

The NC sensor in the fuser unit is defective.


The sensor signal is abnormal due to defective harnes
ss.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Turn the machine off then on. If the problem persists


s, turn off again.

2. Check if Fuser is connected correctly.

es normally by SVC mode.


3. Execute the sensor test to check the sensor operate
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Tes
st Routines)
109-0000 Fuser Temperature
p A
109-0010 Fuser Temperature B

4. Remove Fuser.

(Refer to 3.5 Fuser)

5. Disassemble Fuser and take off the NC thermistor.

(R f to
(Refer t 3.5.1
351F Fuser cover))

6. Measure the resistance value of the thermistor by DVM.


D If the measured value is out of
307KΩ~430KΩ@25℃, replace Thermistor(1404--001453)

7. If the error persists, replace the Fuser(JC91-01144


4A(220V) / JC91-01143A(110V))

8. If the error persists after replacing fuser unit,

replace Main Board(JC92-02587A(40), JC92-0258


87B(30)) .

7-A--12
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


A3-3311 Sensor Failure: Turn
n off then on. Call for service if the problem persists.
A3-3312
A3-3411
A3 3412
A3-3412

● Symptom / Cause :

Inner temperature sensor is defective.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Turn the machine off then on.

y.
2. Check if the sensor connector is connected properly

(Refer to 3.7.13.1 Outer temperature sensor)

Outer temperature
t Sensor

3. If the problem persists, execute the sensor test to ch


heck the sensor operation by SVC mode.

(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Tes


st Routines > 109-0012)

4. Measure the resistance value of the connector at bo


oth ends.

- If the value is not "47.5KΩ~52.5KΩ (@ 25 ℃)", rep


place the temperature sensor(JC32-00015A).

5 If the sensor is not defective


defective, replace Main Board(J
JC92-02587A(40) JC92-02587B(30)) .
JC92-02587A(40),

7-A--13
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C1-1110 Prepare new yellow toner cartridge.

● Symptom / Cause :

Toner remained is 5 ~ 30% of its life.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Print Supply Information Report and check Life


e remaining.

(Machine Setup > Others > Report > System > Supplies
S information)

2. If Toner remains 5~30%, prepare Toner cartriidge(MLT-K606S).

7-C
C-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C1-1130 End of life, Replac
ce with new toner cartridge.
C1-1140 End of life, Replac
ce with new toner cartridge

● Symptom / Cause :

The toner cartridge is at the end of its life

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Print Supply Information Report and check Life


e remaining.

(Machine Setup > Others > Report > System > Supplies
S information)

2. If Toner remains 0%, replace Toner cartridge(M


(MLT-K606S).

7-C
C-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C1-1311 Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-1312. Install imaging unit again

● Symptom / Cause :

Toner supply is inefficient or abnormal.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Remove the toner cartridge.


1 cartridge Shake the toner c
cartridge horizontally to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.

3. Check if the toner supply duct is closed.

nit works well, If not, replace Imaging unit


4. Check if the toner supply shutter on Imaginf un
(MLT-R607K)

7-C
C-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C1-1411 Toner cartridge is not installed. Install it.

● Symptom / Cause:

The toner cartridge is not installed. /


he CRUM data is not detected.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Open Front-cover. Then remove Waste toner box.

2. Is Toner cartridge installed?


YES! NO! → Install Toner cartridge.

Remove Toner cartridge and check the modu ular jack.
Is the modular jack contaminated or deformeed?
YES! NO! → Is modular jack fixed well?
↓ YES! NO! → Replace Tonerr cartridge.(MLT-K606S)
cartridge (MLT K606S).
↓ ↓
↓ Check the signals of unit.

Clean the defective part or remove the debris
s.
Re-install Toner cartridge.
Does the problem persist?
YES! NO! → Finish

Replace Toner cartridge(MLT-606S).
Check harnesses and replace Main board.

7-C
C-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C1-1512 Toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.

● Symptom / Cause :

Toner cartridge is not compatible.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Print the supply information report. Check the toner cartridge information.
(M hi S
(Machine Setup
t > OthOthers > R
Reportt > S
System
t >S
Supplies
li IInformation)
f ti )

place Toner cartridge(MLT-K606S).


2. If it is not a Samsung genuine or defective, rep

7-C
C-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C3-1110 Prepare new imagging unit
C3-1130 Replace with new imaging unit.
C3-1140

● Symptom / Cause :

The Imaging unit has almost reached the end of life.


l

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Print the supply information report. Check the toner cartridge information.
(Machine Setup > Others > Report > System > Supplies
S Information)

ng unit. If its life is over, replace Imaging


2. Check the life remaining information of Imagin
unit(MLT-R607K).

C-6
7-C
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C3-1211 Imaging Unit Failurre:#C3-1211. Please turn off then on
C3-1312 Imaging Unit Failurre:#C3-1312. Please turn off then on

● Symptom / Cause :

Sensor calibration error that detects the toner de


ensity for image stabilization control has
occurred.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open Front-cover and re-install Imaging unit.

d, clean it.
2. If the terminal on Imaging unit is contaminated

3. Check the connection of harness. If there is no


o problem, replace the TC sensor.

4. If the problem persists, replace the Deve clutch


h.

5. Print a Supplies Information.

upplies Information)
(Machine Setup > Others > Report < System > Su

6. If the life of Imaging unit is over, replace Imagiing unit(MLT-R607K).

7-C
C-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C3-1411 Imaging unit is nott installed. Install the unit.

● Symptom / Cause:

Imaging unit is not installed


CRUM data is not detected.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Open Front-cover. Then remove Waste toner box.

2. Is Toner cartridge installed?


YES! NO! → Install Toner cartridge.

Remove Imaging unit and check the modularr jack.
Is the modular jack contaminated or deformeed?
YES! NO! → Is modular jack fixed well?
↓ YES! NO! → Replace Imagiing unit(MLT-R606K).
↓ ↓
↓ Check the signals of unit.

Clean the defective part or remove the debris
s.
Re-install Toner cartridge.
Does the problem persist?
YES! NO! → Finish

Replace Imaging unit(MLT-R606K).
Check harnesses and replace Main board.

7-C
C-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C3-1422 Imaging unit is nott installed. Install the unit

● Symptom / Cause :

The imaging unit need to clean periodically.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open Front-cover.

2. Remove Waste toner box.

3. Clean Imaging unit by charger cleaner.

mes.
※ Pull the cleaner and insert it. Repeat 4~5 tim

persists, replace Imaging unit(M


4 If the problem persists
4. MLT R607K).
MLT-R607K)

Caution

Don't pull the cleaner too hard.

7-C
C-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
C3-1512 Imaging unit is nott compatible. Check user's guide

● Symptom / Cause:

Imaging unit is not compatible

● Troubleshooting method:

e information of Imaging unit.


1. Print Supply Information Report and check the

(Machine Setup > Others > Report > System > Supplies
S information)

2. If Imaging unit has a problem, replace Imaging


g unit.(MLT-K606S).

7-C-10
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● 에러 메시지 :
C6-1110 Prepare new fuserr unit
C6-1120 Replace with new fuser unit

● Symptom / Cause:

Life of Fuse unit is almost over. Replace Fuser un


nit.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. TuRn the machine off then on.

2. If the problem persists, check the following.

maining of Fuser unit.


a. Print a Supply Information. Check the life rem

b. If the fuser life is almost over, get ready for a new Fuser unit.

3. Replace Fuser(JC91-01144A(220V), JC91-01143A(110V)).

(Refer to 3.5 Fuser unit)

a. Open Side-cover.

b, Remove 4 screws.

p
c. Take off Fuser unit and replace it.

7-C-11
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● 에러 메시지 :
C6-1311 Fuser unit is not in
nstalled correctly. Install it.

● Symptom
y p / Cause:

Fuser unit is not installed correctly.


Fuser unit is not connected properly.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. TuRn the machine off then on.

2. Re-install Fuser unit.

ed correctly.
3. Check the harnesses of Fuser unit is connecte

3. If the problem persists, replace Fuser(JC91-01


1144A(220V), JC91-01143A(110V)).
(Refer to 3.5
3 5 Fuser unit)

a. Open Side-cover.

b, Remove 4 screws.

c. Take off Fuser unit and replace it.

7-C-12
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● 에러 메시지 :
C7-1110 Waste toner conta
ainer is full. Replace it
C7-1130 Waste toner conta
ainer is not installed. Install it

● Symptom / Cause:

Waste toner container is almost full.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Open Front
Front-cover.
cover.

2.Remove Waste toner box.

3. Check the waste toner in the box.

4. If the box is almost full, replace Waste toner bo


ox(MLT-W606).

7-C-13
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : 에러 메시지 :
C7-1311 Waste toner conta
ainer is not installed. Install it

● Symptom / Cause:

Waste toner container is not installed.

● Troubleshooting method
method:

1. Open Front-cover.

2. Re-install Waste toner box.

3. If the problem persists, replace Waste toner bo


ox(MLT-W606).

7-C-14
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
H1-1311 Paper jam in tray 3

● Symptom / Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
- The paper from the tray3 has not reached the tray3 fe
eed sensor within normal time after passing the tray4
feed sensor.
- When you open and close the take away (DCF, HCF) door, the paper has jammed at the tray3 feed
sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side & take away door. Remove the jamm med paper.
Close the Side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

2. Open the side & take away. Remove the jammed pa aper between the feed roller of the tray3 pick up unit
and tray2 feed roller. If there is any defective part in this area, replace it.

3 If the
3. th white
hit idle
idl roller
ll off th
the ttake
k away d
door b
breaks
k away,
a release
l th
the iinner cover and
d reassemble
bl th
the idl
idle
roller.

4. Check if the wall connector of tray3 pick up unit(JC8


81-07923A) is connected properly. Reconnect the
connector.

5. Enter the diagnostic mode, and check the feed senssor(0604-001393) test of the tray3 pick up unit.
If the paper is at sensor and “Without paper” messag
ge is displayed, replace the sensor.

6. Check if the connector of the tray3 pick up unit on th


he pick up drive unit is connected properly. Reconnect
it.

7. Replace the DCF board (JC81-08324A) or HCF boa


ard(JC81-07292A)

7-H
H-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
H1-1312 Paper jam in tray 3

● Symptom / Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
- The
Th paper h
has nott reached
h d th
the ttray3
3 ffeed
d sensor with
ith
hi normall titime after
hin ft pick
i k up.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side & take away door. Remove the jamm med paper.
Cl
Close th
the Sid
Side d
door. Aft
After warm up, if same jam
j occ
curs, check
h k th
the ffollowing.
ll i

2. Install the Pick up (forward, reverse ) roller correctly


y.

3. If the pick up(forward, reverse) roller (JC93-00175A) is worn out or contaminated, replace it.

4. Check if p
paper
p in the cassette are curled,, replace
p the p
paper
p or stretch to remove curling.
g

5. Check if the wall connector of tray3 pick up unit is co


onnected properly.
Reconnect the connector.

6. If the problem persists, remove the pick up unit(JC8 81-07923A) and check the following.
A. If the spring at the bottom of the pick up unit break ks away or is broken, replace the spring.
If the
th assembly
bl mold ld partt with
ith spring
i iis b
broken,
k re
eplace
l itit.
B. If the compression spring of the guide-forward pick k up breaks away, reassemble or replace it.
C. If the error message displays despite paper empty y in the cassette, check the empty actuator and photo
interrupt. Reassemble the empty actuator or replac ce the photo interrupter(0604-001393).

In case that the actuator is broken, check the following


g:

1. Does the pick up (forward) roller rotate?


A. Check if the clutch connector of the pick up drive unit
u is connected properly. Reconnect it.
B. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “clutch test” . If it is defective, replace it.
C. If the timing belt of the pick up drive unit breaks aw
way or is broken, replace it.
D. Check if the motor connector of the pick up drive unit
u is connected properly. Reconnect it.
E. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “motor test” . If I it is defective, replace it.

2. Replace the DCF board (JC81-08324A) or HCF boa


ard(JC81-07292A)

7-H
H-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
H1-1317 Paper jam in tray 3
H1-1318

● Symptom
S t /C
Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
- The paper from the tray3 has not reached the tray3 fe
eed sensor within normal time after passing the tray4
feed sensor.
- When you open and close the take away (DCF, HCF) door, the paper has jammed at the tray3 feed
sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side & take away door. Remove the jamm med paper.
Close the Side door
door. After warm up,
up if same jam occcurs,
curs check the following
following.

2. Open the side & take away. Remove the jammed pa aper between the feed roller of the tray3 pick up unit
and tray2 feed roller. If there is any defective part in this area, replace it.

3. If the white idle roller of the take away door breaks away,
a release the inner cover and reassemble the idle
roller.

4. Check if the wall connector of tray3 pick up unit(JC8


81-07923A) is connected properly. Reconnect the
connector.

5. Enter the diagnostic mode, and check the feed senssor(0604-001393) test of the tray3 pick up unit.
If the paper is at sensor and “Without paper” messag
ge is displayed, replace the sensor.

6. Check if the connector of the tray3 pick up unit on th


he pick up drive unit is connected properly. Reconnect
it.

7. Replace the DCF board (JC81-08324A) or HCF boa


ard(JC81-07292A)

7-H
H-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
H1-1411 Paper jam in tray 4.

● Symptom / Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
- When you open and close the DCF take away door, the
t paper has jammed at the tray4 feed sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1 Open the DCF take away door


1. door. Remove the jammed d paper
paper.
Close the DCF take away door. After warm up, if same jam occurs, check the following.

2. Check if the wall connector of tray4 pick up unit is co


onnected properly. Reconnect the connector.

3. Enter the diagnostic mode, and check the feed senssor test of the DCF pick up unit.
If the paper is contacting sensor and “Without paper”” message is displayed, replace the sensor.

4. Check if the connector of the tray4 pick up unit(JC81-07923A) on the pick up drive unit is connected
properly.
Reconnect it.

ard(JC81-07292A)
5. Replace the DCF board (JC81-08324A) or HCF boa

7-H
H-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
H1-1412 Paper jam in dual ca
apacity feeder.

● Symptom / Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
- The paper has not reached the tray4 feed sensor with
hin normal time after pick up.

● Troubleshooting method :

1 Open the side & take away door


1. door. Remove the jammmed paper.
paper
Close the Side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

2. Install the Pick up (forward, retard )roller correctly.

3. If the pick up roller is worn out or contaminated, replace it.

4. Check if paper in the cassette are curled, replace the paper or stretch to remove curling.

5. Check if the wall connector of tray3 pick up unit is co


onnected properly. Reconnect the connector.

6. If the problem persists, remove the pick up unit and check the following.
A. If the spring at the bottom of the pick up unit break
ks away or is broken, replace the spring.
If the assembly mold part with spring is broken
broken, re
eplace itit.
B. If the compression spring of the guide-forward pick k up breaks away, reassemble or replace it.
C. If the error message displays despite paper empty y in the cassette, check the empty actuator and photo
interrupt. Reassemble the empty actuator or replac ce the photo interrupter(0604-001393).

In case that the actuator is broken, check the following


g:

1. Does the pick up (forward) roller rotate?


A. Check if the clutch connector of the pick up drive unit
u is connected properly. Reconnect it.
B. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “clutch test” . If it is defective, replace it.
C. If the timing belt of the pick up drive unit breaks aw
way or is broken, replace it.
D. Check if the motor connector of the pick up drive unit
u is connected properly. Reconnect it.
E. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “motor test” . If I it is defective, replace it.

2. Replace the DCF board (JC81-08324A) or HCF boa


ard(JC81-07292A)

7-H
H-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
H1-1417 Paper jam in tray 4
H1-1418

● Symptom / Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
- The paper from the tray4 has not reached the tray4 fe
eed sensor within normal time.
- When you open and close the take away (DCF, HCF) door, the paper has jammed at the tray4 feed
sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side & take away door. Remove the jamm med paper.
Close the Side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

2. Open the side & take away. Remove the jammed pa aper between the feed roller of the tray4 pick up unit
and tray3 feed roller. If there is any defective part in
n this area, replace it.

3. If the white idle roller of the take away door breaks away,
a release the inner cover and reassemble the idle
roller.

4. Check if the wall connector of tray4 pick up unit(JC8


81-07923A) is connected properly. Reconnect the
connector.

5. Enter the diagnostic mode, and check the feed senssor(0604-001393) test of the tray4 pick up unit.
If the paper is at sensor and “Without paper” messag
ge is displayed, replace the sensor.

6 Check if the connector of the tray4 pick up unit on th


6. he pick up drive unit is connected properly.
properly
Reconnect it.

7. Replace the DCF board (JC81-08324A) or HCF boa


ard(JC81-07292A)

7-H
H-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M1-1113 Paper jam in tray 1.

● Symptom / Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
- The paper has not reached the tray1 feed sensor witthin normal time after pick up
up.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the Side door. If there is a jammed paper, rem


move it.
Close the Side door. After warm up, if same jam occurs, check the following.

2. Install the Pick up (forward, retard )roller correctly.

3. If the pick up roller(JC93-00540A) is worn out or contaminated, replace it.

4. Check if paper in the cassette are curled, replace th


he paper or stretch to remove curling.

5. Check if the wall connector of tray1 pick up unit is connected


c properly. Reconnect the connector.

6. If the problem persists, remove the pick up unit(JC9 93-00070A(1st)/ JC93-00174A(2nd)) and check the
following.
a. If the spring at the bottom of the pick up unit break
ks away or is broken, replace the spring.
If the assembly mold part with spring is broken, re
eplace it.
b. If the compression spring of the guide-forward pick k up breaks away, reassemble or replace it.
c. If the error message displays despite paper empty y in the cassette, check the empty actuator and photo
interrupt. Reassemble the empty actuator or replace the photo interrupter.

In case that the actuator is broken, check the following


g:

1 Does the pick up (forward) roller rotate?


1.
a. Check if the clutch connector of the pick up drive unit(JC93-00065A) is connected properly.
Reconnect it.
b. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “clutch test” . If it is defective, replace it(JC47-00037A).
c. If the timing belt of the pick up drive unit breaks away
a or is broken, replace it.
d. Check if the motor connector of the pick up drive unit is connected properly. Reconnect it.
e. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “motor test” . If it is defective, replace it.

2. Replace the main board(JC92-02587A(for 8240) / JC92-02587B(for


J 8230))

7-M
M-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M1-1213 Paper jam in tray 2.

● Symptom / Cause :
p transport
Paper p jjam (p(paper
p Input
p section))
- The paper has not reached the tray2 feed sensor witthin normal time after pick up.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the Side door. If there is a jammed paper, rem


move it.
Cl
Close the
h Sid
Side d
door. Af
After warm up, if same jjam occurs, check
h k the
h ffollowing.
ll i

2. Install the Pick up (forward, retard )roller correctly.

3. If the pick up roller(JC93-00540A) is worn out or contaminated, replace it.

4. C
Check
ec if pape
paper in tthe
e cassette a
are
e cu
curled,
ed, replace
ep ace tth
hee pape
paper o
or st
stretch
etc to remove
e o e cu
curling.
g

5. Check if the wall connector of tray1 pick up unit is connected


c properly. Reconnect the connector.

6. If the problem persists, remove the pick up unit(JC9 93-00070A(1st)/ JC93-00174A(2nd)) and check the
following.
a. If the spring at the bottom of the pick up unit breakks away or is broken, replace the spring.
Iff the assembly mold part with spring is broken, re
eplace it.
b. If the compression spring of the guide-forward pick k up breaks away, reassemble or replace it.
c. If the error message displays despite paper empty y in the cassette, check the empty actuator and photo
interrupt. Reassemble the empty actuator or replace the photo interrupter.

In case that the actuator is broken, check the following


g:

1. Does the pick up (forward) roller rotate?


a. Check if the clutch connector of the pick up drive unit(JC93-00065A) is connected properly.
Reconnect it.
b. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “clutch test” . If it is defective, replace it(JC47-00037A).
c. If the timing belt of the pick up drive unit breaks away
a or is broken, replace it.
d. Check if the motor connector of the pick up drive unit is connected properly. Reconnect it.
e. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “motor test” . If it is defective, replace it.

2. Replace the main board(JC92-02587A(for 8240) / JC92-02587B(for


J 8230))

7-M
M-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M1-1610 Paper jam in MP tray
y.

● Symptom / Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
- The paper has not reached the regi sensor within norrmal time after MP pick up.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Remove the jammed paper from the MP tray.

2 Open the side door


2. door. Remove the jammed paper
paper.
Close the Side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

3. Install the MP Pick up (forward, retard )roller correcttly.

4. If the MP pick up roller(JC90-00989A) is worn out orr contaminated, replace it.

5. Check if papers in the MP tray are curled, replace th


he paper or stretch to remove curling.

6. Open the side door and remove the lower cover from m the rear of the side unit. Check if the connector of
the MP tray unit and the connector of the joint PBA are
e connected properly. Reconnect the connector.

7. If the problem persists, remove the MP unit(JC90-00 0921A) from the side unit and check the following.
a If the spring at the bottom of the MP unit breaks aw
a. way or is broken
broken, replace the spring
spring.
If the assembly mold part with spring is broken, re eplace it.
b. If the spring of the guide to fix the pick up roller in MP
M unit breaks away, reassemble or replace it.
c. If the error message displays despite paper empty in the cassette, check the empty actuator and photo
interrupt. Reassemble the empty actuator or replac ce the photo interrupter.
d. If the driving gear breaks away or is broken, reasse emble or replace it.

In case that the actuator is broken, check the following


g:

1. Does the pick up (forward) roller rotate?


a. Check if the MP clutch connector is connected properly. Reconnect it.
b. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “MP clutch teest” . If it is defective, replace it.
c. Check if the motor connector of the MP drive unit is connected properly. Reconnect it.
d If MP solenoid(JC33-00029B)
d. solenoid(JC33 00029B) on but pick up rolle
er moves down, down check for each link link, part missing
missing,
part defect. And reassemble it.
e. Enter the diagnostic mode. Execute “MP drive mo otor test” . If it is defective, replace it.

2. Replace the main board(JC92-02587A(for 8240) / JC


C92-02587B(for 8230))

7-M
M-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M2-1121 Paper jam inside of machine.
m
M2-1124
M2-1125
M2-1131
M2-1134
M2-1135

● Symptom / Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
- The ppaper
p from the tray3
y (or
( 4)) has not reached to the tray2
y feed sensor within normal time after passing
p g
the tray3 feed sensor.
- When you open and close the take away door, the paaper has jammed at the tray2 feed sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side & take away door. Remove the jamm med paper.
Close the Side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

2. Open the side & take away.


Remove the jammed paper between the feed roller of the tray2 pick up unit and tray1 feed roller.
If there is any defective part in this area, replace it.

3. If the white idle roller of the take away door breaks away,
a
release the inner cover and reassemble the idle rolle er.

4. Check if the wall connector of tray1 pick up unit(JC9


93-00070A) is connected properly.
Reconnect the connector.

5. Enter the diagnostic mode, and check the feed sens sor test of the tray1 pick up unit.
If the paper is contacting sensor and “Without paperr” message is displayed,
replace the sensor(0604-001393).

6. Check if the connector of the tray2 pick up unit on th


he pick up drive unit is connected properly.
Reconnect it.

7. Replace the main board(JC92-02587A(for 8240) / JC


C92-02587B(for 8230))

7-M
M-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M2-1211 Paper jam inside of machine.
m
M2-1213
M2-1214
M2-1221

● Symptom / Cause :

Paper transport jam (paper Input section)


1. The paper has not reached the regi sensor within no
ormal time after passing the tray1 feed sensor.
2. When opening the side door, the paper is detected at
a the regi sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side (take away) door. Remove the jamme ed paper.
Close the side (take away) door. After warm up, if sa
ame jam occurs, check the following.

2. If there is any obstacles between the tray1 feed rolle


er and the regi roller, remove it.

3. Check if the idle roller on bottom of the side unit is fiixed correctly. If or not, disassemble the Guide and
reassemble the idle roller. .

In case of the electrical part problem, check the followiing :

1. Check if the reflective connector, junction connecto


or on the middle of regi roller are connected properly.
Reconnect the connector.

2. Enter the diagnostic mode, and check the reflective sensor test.
If the p
paper
p is at sensor and “Without paper”
p p messag g
ge is displayed,
p y replace
p the sensor.

3. Enter the diagnostic mode, and check the motor test of the pick up drive unit.
If the motor is broken, replace it.

4. Check if the regi connector of main board is connected properly. Reconnect it.

5 R
5. Replace
l th
the main
i bboard(JC92-02587A(for
d(JC92 02587A(f 8240) / JC
C92 02587B(f 8230))
C92-02587B(for

7-M
M-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M2-1321 Paper jam inside of machine.
m
M2-1324
M2-1325

● Symptom / Cause :

1. The paper has not reached to the Fuser In sensor within


w a regular time after passing the registration
sensor.
2. When opening the side door, the paper is detected at
a the Fuser In Sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side (take away) door. Remove the jamme ed paper.
Close the side (take away) door. After warm up, if sa
ame jam occurs, check the following.

2. If there is any obstacles between the tray1 feed rolle


er and the regi roller, remove it.

3. Check if the idle roller on bottom of the side unit is fiixed correctly. If or not, disassemble the Guide and
reassemble the idle roller.

In case of the electrical part problem, check the followiing :

1. Check if the reflective connector, junction connecto


or on the middle of regi roller are connected properly.
Reconnect the connector.

2. Enter the diagnostic mode, and check the reflective sensor test.
If the paper is at sensor and “Without paper” messagge is displayed, replace the sensor.

3. Enter the diagnostic mode,


3 mode and check the motor test of the pick up drive unit.
unit
If the motor is broken, replace it.

4. Check if the regi connector of main board is connected properly. Reconnect it.

5. Replace the main board(JC92-02587A(for 8240) / JC


C92-02587B(for 8230))

7-M
M-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M2-1331 Paper jam inside of machine.
m
M2-1333
M2-1334

● Symptom
S t /CCause : Paper
P transport
t t jam
j (paper
( Inp
I putt section)
ti )
- The paper has not reached the fuser out sensor with hin normal time after passing the regi sensor.
- The fuser out sensor is not off within normal time afte
er the fuser out sensor on.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side door. Remove the jammed paper.


Close the side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

2. If there is any obstacles between the tray1 feed rolle


er and the regi roller, remove it.

3. If the 2nd transfer roller or assembly


y is damaged,
g rep
p
place it.

4. If the problem persists, separate the side unit from set.


s And check the following.

5. If Cam, lever, spring of the 2nd transfer roller engage


e device are damaged, replace the 2nd transfer roller.
(JC95-01038A)

6 If th
6. the actuator-fuser
t t f out,
t guide-face
id f up exitit are dama
d aged,
d replace
l th
them.

7. Enter the diagnostic mode, and execute the fuser ou ut sensor test.
Fix the actuator and be the paper at sensor. If “Witho
out paper” message is displayed, replace the
sensor.

8. Check if the fuser out sensor connector is connected


dpproperly.
p y Reconnect the connector.

9. Replace the Joint PBA of the side unit.

10. Replace the harness of the side unit.

11. Check if the connector of the main board is connec


cted properly. Reconnect the connector.

12. Replace the main board(JC92-02587A(for 8240) / JC92-02587B(for 8230))

7-M
M-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M2-2111 Paper jam at the top of duplex path.
M2-2113
M2-2114

● Symptom / Cause : Paper transport jam (paper Input section)


- The paper has not reached to the duplex jam 1 senso
or within normal time after passing the return sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side door. Remove the jammed paper.


Close the side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

2. Check if the gate on duplex path of the side unit is operated


o properly. When you lift the gate and put
down, if it doesn’t come down automatically, replace e or reassemble it.

3. If there is any obstacles on duplex path, remove it.

4. If the feed roller is broken away, reassemble it.

5. Make the duplex 1 jam sensor be pushed by pushing duplex gate and pulling down the timing belt.
Close the side door.
Enter the diagnostic mode, and execute the duplex 1 jam sensor test.
Be the paper is at sensor. If “Without
Without paper
paper” messag
ge is displayed, replace the sensor or the actuator.

6. Enter the diagnostic mode, execute the duplex clutcch test.


If there is no operation sound, reconnect the connec
ctor or replace the clutch.

7. Enter the diagnostic mode, execute the MP motor te est.


If there is no operation sound, reconnect the connec
ctor or replace the MP motor.

8. Enter the diagnostic mode, execute the duplex solen noid test.
If there is no operation sound, reconnect the solenoid connector or replace the solenoid.

8. If the solenoid works but paper folded jam occurs, check the return spring and link. Reassemble or
replace it. For this, you have to remove the Cover-P
PCB of the side unit.

10. Check if the Side Joint PBA connector is connected properly. If there is any problem, reconnect the
connector or replace the Side Joint PBA(JC95-011125A).

7-M
M-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M2-2213 Paper jam at the top of duplex path.
M2-2215
M2-2216

● Symptom / Cause :

Paper transport jam (paper Input section)


1. The paper has not reached the duplex jam 2 sensoor within a regular time after passing the duplex jam
1 sensor.
2. When opening the side door, the paper is detected
d at the duplex jam 2 sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1 Open the side door


1. door. Remove the jammed paper
paper.
Close the side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

2. If there is any obstacles on duplex path, remove it.

3. If the feed roller is broken away, reassemble it.

4. Make the duplex 2 jam sensor be pushed by pushing duplex gate and pulling down the timing belt.
Close the side door.
Enter the diagnostic mode, and execute the duplex 2 jam sensor test.
Be the paper at sensor. If “Without paper” message is displayed, replace the sensor or the actuator.

5. Check if the Side Joint PBA connector is connected properly. If there is any problem, reconnect the
connector or replace the Side Joint PBA(JC95-011
PBA(JC95 011125A).
125A)

7-M
M-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M2-2411 Paper jam at the retu
urn of duplex path.
M2-2413
M2-2414

● Symptom / Cause :
Paper transport jam (paper Input section)
1. The paper has not reached the fuser out sensor within
w normal time after passing the fuser out sensor.
2. When opening the side door, the paper is detected
d at the return sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side door. Remove the jammed paper.


Close the side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

2. If the idle roller of the exit unit(JC90-00914C) is dam


maged or not assembled, reassemble it properly.

3. If there is any obstacles on return path of the exit un


nit, remove it.

4. Enter the diagnostic mode, and execute the return sensor


s test.
Be the paper at sensor. If “Without paper” message is
i displayed, replace the reflect type sensor or the
actuator.

5. Close the side door. Enter the diagnostic mode, exeecute the exit solenoid on/off of the actuator test.
If there is no operation sound, reconnect or replace the
t solenoid connector.

6. Check if the return gate of the exit unit is assembled


d with torsion spring on the rear of set properly.
Reassemble or replace the spring. ( Solenoid spring g is the same )

7. Reconnect the exit unit wall connector and close the


e side door.

8. If the problem persists, disassemble the exit unit and


d check the following.
If any part is damaged, replace it.
A. Check if the gate return is damaged or deformed.
B. Check if the reflect type sensor connector is conne ected properly.

9. Check if the exit connector on main board. Reconne


ect it.

10. Replace the main board(JC92-02587A(for 8240) / JC92-02587B(for 8230))

7-M-10
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M3-1211 Paper jam in exit are
ea.
M3-1213
M3-1214

● Symptom / Cause :

Paper transport jam (paper output section)


- The paper has not reached the exit sensor or face up
p exit sensor within normal time after passing the
output sensor.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Open the side door. And remove the jammed paperr.


Close the side door. After warm up, if same jam occ
curs, check the following.

2. If the idle roller of the exit unit is damaged or not ass


sembled, reassemble it properly.

3. If there is any obstacles on paper path of the exit un


nit, remove it.

4. Enter the diagnostic mode, and execute the exit sen


nsor test.
Be the paper at sensor. If “Without paper” message is
i displayed, replace the sensor.

5. Check if the return gate of the exit unit is assembled


d with torsion spring on the rear of set properly.
Reassemble or replace the spring. ( Solenoid spring g is the same )

6. Reconnect the exit unit wall connector and close the


e side door.

7. If the problem persists, disassemble the exit unit and d check the following.
If any part is damaged, replace it.
A. Check if the gate return is damaged or deformed.
B. Check if the idle roller, holder in the exit unit is dam
maged.
C. Check if the actuator exit sensor is damaged.
D. Check if the photo interrupter is damaged or the co onnector is connected properly.

8 Check if the exit connector on engine controller


8. controller. Recconnect itit.

9. Replace the main board.

7-M-11
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
M3-2230 Output tray is full. Re
emove printed media.

● Symptom / Cause :
Too much paper in output bin tray (paper out put sectiion)
- The bin full sensor actuator or sensor is defective.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Remove the exit unit from the set. And replace the face
f down antistatic brush.

2. Enter the diagnostic mode, and execute the face down bin full sensor test.
When lifting the bin full actuator
actuator, if “without
without paper
paper” iss displayed,
displayed replace the photo interrupter or
reconnect the connector.

3. If the photo interrupter is broken away from the exit unit, remove the exit unit and reassemble the photo
interrupter.

4. Check if the photo interrupter connector, junction co


onnector are connected properly.
If the connector is unplugged, remove exit unit and reconnect
r the connector.

5. Check if the regi connector on the engine controller is connected properly.


Reconnect it.

6. Replace the main board(JC92-02587A(for 8240) / JC


C92-02587B(for 8230))

7-M-12
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S1-2411 HDD System Failurre #S1-2411: Turn off then on.

● Symptom / Cause :

Hard Disk is not installed in the machine.


H d Di
Hard Disk
k iis d
defective.
f ti

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Check whether Hard Disk is installed correctly..


a. Remove Rear-cover.
b. Check the connectors of Hard Disk and Main board.

3. If the problem persists, replace HDD(JC59-000


0035A) .

7-S
S-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S1–2433 System Failure: #S
S1-2433 . Call for service
S1–2443 HDD System Failurre #S1-2443 : Call for service
S1–2444 HDD System Failurre #S1-2444 : Call for service
S1–2445 HDD System Failurre #S1-2445 : Call for service
S1–2446 HDD System Failurre #S1-2446 : Call for service
S1–2447 HDD System
y Failurre #S1-2447 : Call for service
S1–2448 HDD System Failurre #S1-2448 : Call for service
S1–2449 HDD System Failurre #S1-2449 : Call for service

● Symptom / Cause :

System Memory is corrupted. Please contact serv


vice center.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Delete all saved data on HDD by SVC mode.


(Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > All Saved Data Clear)
2. If the problem persists, initializes Hard disc by SVC mode, System Recovery.
(Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > System Recovery)

(Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance >

3. If the problem persists, replace HDD(JC59-000


0035A).

7-S
S-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S1–2434 HDD Error #S1-24434. Check users guide
S1–2435 HDD Error #S1-24435. Check users guide
S1–2436 HDD Error #S1-24436. Check users guide
S1–2437 HDD Error #S1-24437. Check users guide
S1–2438 HDD Error #S1-24438. Check users guide
S1–2439 HDD Error #S1-24439. Check users g
guide

● Symptom / Cause :

Memory is almost full

● Troubleshooting method:

• S1-2434 : Addresses in Address book / User data in User profile


• S1-2435 : Documents in Document box / Jobs in Secure job list / Fonts / Forms
• S1-2436 : System Logs
• S1-2437/3438/3439 : Printing Error / No Papeer in Tray

1. Delete all saved data on HDD by SVC mode.


(Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > All Saved Data Clear)
2. If the problem persists, initializes Hard disc by SVC mode, System Recovery.
(Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > System Recovery)

(Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance >

3. If the problem persists, replace HDD(JC59-000


0035A).

7-S
S-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S1-2510 MSOK System Faillure #S1-2510: Turn off then on.
S1-2511 MSOK System Faillure #S1-2511: Turn off then on.
S1–2523 PPM data is incorrrect. Call for service & change MSOK.
S1–2540 MSOK Failure: #S1 1-2540. Call for service & change MSOK

● Symptom / Cause :

Communication error between data storage devic


ce of MSOK and Main board
MSOK or Main board is defective.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Check if the MSOK is inserted correctly. Remove and reinstall it.


a. Remove Rear cover.
b. Check if MSOK is correctly connected.

c. Check if the connecter and harness are corre


ectly plugged.

2. If the problem persists, replace Main board(JC


C92-02587A(40), JC92-02587B(30)).

7-S
S-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S1-3110 Video System Failu
ure: #S1-3110. Turn off then on
● Symptom / Cause:

OPE does not operate.


Main board or OPE HUB Board is defective.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Check the harness is connected correctly on Ma


ain board.
a. Remove Rear-cover.
b. Check if the connection between UI and Main board is correctly.

2. Check the harness is connected correctly on OP


PE HUB board.
a. Disassemble OPE HUB Unit.
b. Check the connection on OPE HUB board.

3. If the problem persists, replace Main Board(JC


C92-02587A(40), JC92-02587B(30)).

7-S
S-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S2-1211 Engine System Failure: #S2-1211. Turn off then on
S2-2311 Engine System Failure: #S2-2311. Turn off then on
S2-3110 Engine System Failure: #S2-3110. Turn off then on

● Symptom
S t / Cause:
C

* S2-1211
Power Micom chip is defected.

*S2-2311, 3110
Communication error on Main System
y or Engine
g System
y

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the machine off then on.


2. Check the connectors on Mainboard is correctly
y.

(Refer to 8. System Diagram)


3. Re-install the system F/W,
3. If the problem persists, replace Main board(JC9
C92-02587A(40), JC92-02587B(30)).

7-S
S-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S2-4210 Front door is open
n. Close it
S2-4410 Right door is open
n. Close it
S2-4A10 Feed door is openn. Close it
● Symptom / Cause:

Front door or right door is open


open.
Feed door is open.
All door is closed but this error is displayed.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Check if the front door and right door is closed perfectly.


2. Check the harness path.
3. If the harness path is OK, Main board(JC92-02
2587A(40), JC92-02587B(30)).

7-S
S-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S3-3111 Scan System Failu
ure: #S3-3111. Turn off then on

● Symptom / Cause:

Communication error on Scan board or Main boa


ard.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the machine off then on.


2. If the problem persists, remove DADF.
(Refer to 3
3.4.1
4 1 Scan Assembly)
3. Open Scan rear cover, then check connectors
s on Scan joint board.

4. Check if the connection between Main board and


a Scan unit is correct.

4. If there is no problem, replace SCAN-JOINT BOARD(JC97-04224A)


BO .
5. If the problem persists, replace Main board(JC9
C92-02587A(40), JC92-02587B(30)).

7-S
S-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S3-3121 Scanner locked orr another problem occurred.(No Switch
Case)Scanner is lo
ocked
● Symptom / Cause:

Scanner module does not operate.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the machine off then on.


2. If the problem persists, remove DADF.
(Refer to 3.4.1 Scan assembly)
3. Push the cover-open sensor and check if Scan unit operates normally.
4. If Scan unit does not operate, open Scan glass
s. Then push and pull the scan module.
(Reger to 3.4.2 Scan glass)

5. Open Scan-rear cover. Check the connection of Motor and Scan board.

6. If the connection has no problem, replace SCA


AN-JOINT BOARD(JC97-04224A).
7. If the problem persists, replace Main board(JC9
C92-02587A(40), JC92-02587B(30)).

7-S
S-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S3-3211 Scan System Failu
ure #S3-3211: Turn off then on.

● Symptom / Cause:

DADF is not connected communication error occ


curs with CIP6 board.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the power off then turn on.


2. If the problem persists, check the DADF unit co
onnection.
(Refer to 3.16 DADF )

3. If the connection has no problem, replace DAD


DF board(JC97-04212A).
persists, replace Main board(JC9
4 If the problem persists
4. C92-02587A(40)
C92 02587A(40), JC92-02587B(30))
JC92 02587B(30)).

7-S--10
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S5-3131 UI System Failure

● Symptom / Cause:

When user inputs some data on UI to use options


s or functions, UI System error is occurred.

UI system is temporary stopped / The fatal error is occurred on cache area in HDD

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Close the error message, then return to the hom


me menu.
2. If the p
problem p
persists, create new image
g on Hibernation
H mode.
(Service mode > Service Functions > Hiberna
ation mode > Create new image)

7-S--11
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S6-3122 Network cable is disconnected.
d Check it.
● Symptom / Cause:

Network cable is disconnected.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the machine off then on.


2. Check if the network harness and connector are
e correctly connected.
a. Insert the network harness to connector rightlyy.
b. Check the LED light near the network connecto
or.
- If it is connected correctly, green lamp is turn
n on.
- If not, the orange lamp is flickers

7-S--12
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E Code
C d : ● Error
E Message
M :
S6-3123 This IP address co
onflicts with that of other system. Check it.
● Symptom / Cause:

Network error.
IP address conflicts with that of another system or
o Communication error

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Check if a wrong IP address is inserted.


2. IP address has no problem, change the IP addre
ess to new one.
(Machine Setup > Network Setting > Login > TCP/IP
P > Select the network protocol > IP Setting)

7-S--13
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


U1-2114 Fuser Failure: #U1-2
2114. Turn off then on.
U1-2119 Fuser Failure: #U1-2
2119. Turn off then on.

● Symptom / Cause:

Fuser is not heated.


• U1–2114 : The center of the roller is not heated.
• U1–2119 : The end of the roller is not heated.
● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the machine off then on.

2. If the problem persists, check the following.

a. Check the voltage of Fuser unit.

ected.
b. Check the coil of Heat Lamp is broken or disconne

(Refer to 3.5.2 Halogen lamp)

c. Check if Heat Lamp is connected correctly.

d. Check the connectors on Drawer connector is fully


y inserted.

e. Check whether Thermostat is disconnected.

U-1
7-U
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Troubleshooting
T bl h ti method:
th d

at-roller.
f. Check if the jammed or wrapped paper is on a hea

g. Check if the resistance of NC Sensor is pertinent.

h. Check the input voltage is properly supplied.

A(220V), JC91-01143A(110V)).
3. If the problem persists, replace Fuser(JC91-01144A

(Refer to 3.5 Fuser)

4 If the problem persists,


4. persists replace Main board,
board FDB o
or SMPS.
SMPS

(Reference)

Main Board : JC92-02587A(SCX-8240), JC92-02


2587B(SCX-8230)

FDB : JC44-00226A(110V), JC44-00227A(220V)

V)
SMPS : JC44-00097E(110V), JC44-00090E(220V)

7-U
U-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
U1-2115 Fuser Failure: #U1-2
2115. Turn off then on.

● Symptom / Cause:

Toner is not fixed permanently.


It's difficult to take off the jammed paper.
Wave or wrinkle occurs on a paper.

Pressure control unit is abnormal.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the machine off then on.

ol unit by SVC mode.


2. Check the operational sound of the pressure contro

(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Tes


st Routines > 100-0440)

3. If the problem persists, check the following.

a. Turn
T the
th machine
hi off.
ff

b. Open Side-cover. Remove Fuser unit

c. Take off Rear-cover.

(Refer to 3.5.1 Fuser cover)

d. Check the connection of harnesses and connectorrs

e. Check if the gears of Pressure control unit are abn


normal.

f. Check if PR Release motor is broken. if it has prob


blems, replace Drive Release(JC93-00120A).

(Refer to 3.11 PR release drive unit)

4. If the problem persists, replace Fuser(JC91-01144A


A(220V), JC91-01143A(110V)).

(Refer to 3.5 Fuser)

7-U
U-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
U1-2131 Fuser Failure: #U1-2
2131. Turn off then on.
U1-2134 Fuser Failure: #U1-2
2134. Turn off then on.

● Symptom / Cause:

Fuser temperature
p is lower than normal-operational
p sttate. ((ready,
y, printing)
p g)
• U1–2131 : The center of the roller is not heated.
• U1–2134 : The end of the roller is not heated.
● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the machine off then on.

2 If th
2. the problem
bl persists,
i t check
h k th
the ffollowing.
ll i

a. Check the voltage of Fuser unit.

ected.
b. Check the coil of Heat Lamp is broken or disconne

(Refer to 3.5.2 Halogen lamp)

c, Check if Heat Lamp is connected correctly.

d. Check the connectors on Drawer connector is fully


y inserted.

e. Check whether Thermostat is disconnected.

7-U
U-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Troubleshooting method:

at-roller.
f. Check if the jammed or wrapped paper is on a hea

g Check if the resistance of NC Sensor is pertinent


g. pertinent.

h. Check the input voltage is properly supplied.

3 If the problem persists,


3. persists replace Fuser(JC91
Fuser(JC91-01144A
01144A
A(220V) JC91
A(220V), JC91-01143A(110V))
01143A(110V)).

(Refer to 3.5 Fuser)

4. If the problem persists, replace Main board, FDB or


o SMPS.

(Reference)

Main Board : JC92-02587A(SCX-8240), JC92-02


2587B(SCX-8230)

FDB : JC44-00226A(110V), JC44-00227A(220V)

V)
SMPS : JC44-00097E(110V), JC44-00090E(220V)

7-U
U-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
U1-2132 Fuser Failure: #U1-2
2132. Turn off then on.
U1-2135 Fuser Failure: #U1-2
2135. Turn off then on.

● Symptom / Cause:

Fuser temperature
p is lower than normal-operational
p sttate. (warm-up)
( p)
• U1–2132 : The center of the roller is not heated.
• U1–2135 : The end of the roller is not heated.
● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the machine off then on.

2 If th
2. the problem
bl persists,
i t check
h k th
the ffollowing.
ll i

a. Check the voltage of Fuser unit.

ected.
b. Check the coil of Heat Lamp is broken or disconne

(Refer to 3.5.2 Halogen lamp)

c, Check if Heat Lamp is connected correctly.

d. Check the connectors on Drawer connector is fully


y inserted.

e. Check whether Thermostat is disconnected.

7-U
U-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Troubleshooting method:

at-roller.
f. Check if the jammed or wrapped paper is on a hea

g. Check if the resistance of NC Sensor is pertinent.

h. Check the input voltage is properly supplied.

A(220V), JC91-01143A(110V)).
3. If the problem persists, replace Fuser(JC91-01144A

((Refer to 3.5 Fuser))

4. If the problem persists, replace Main board, FDB otr


o SMPS.

(Reference)

Main Board : JC92-02587A(SCX-8240), JC92-02


2587B(SCX-8230)

FDB : JC44-00226A(110V), JC44-00227A(220V)

SMPS : JC44-00097E(110V), JC44-00090E(220V)


V)

7-U
U-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


U1-2141 Fuser Failure: #U1-2
2131. Turn off then on.
U1-2142 Fuser Failure: #U1-2
2142. Turn off then on.

● Symptom / Cause:

Fuser temperature is higher than normal-operational state.


s
• U1–2141 : The center of the roller is not heated.
• U1–2142 : The end of the roller is not heated.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Turn the machine off then on.

2. If the problem persists, check the following.

a. Check the voltage of Fuser unit.

b. Check if the jammed or wrapped paper is on the heat-roller..


h

c Check if the resistance of NC Sensor is pertinent


c. pertinent.

3. If the problem persists, replace Fuser(JC91-01144A


A(220V), JC91-01143A(110V)).

(Refer to 3.5 Fuser)

4. If the problem persists, replace Main board, FDB otr


o SMPS.

(Reference)

Main Board : JC92-02587A(SCX-8240), JC92-02


2587B(SCX-8230)

FDB : JC44-00226A(110V), JC44-00227A(220V)

SMPS : JC44-00097E(110V), JC44-00090E(220V)


V)

7-U
U-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error
E code
d : ● Error
E message :
U2-1111 LSU Failure: #U2-1111. Turn off then on.
U2-1114 LSU Failure: #U2-1114. Turn off then on

● Symptom and Cause

Symptom
S t :
- LSU Motor does not operate.
LSU Motor operates abnormally. - Motor Ready sig
gnal is incorrect.

Cause :
- LSU Motor or Motor Drive PBA is broken.
- A LSU Motor harness is connected incorrectly.
y
- A LSU Motor generates signals abnormally or does
s not operate.

● Solution :

ational noise.
1. Turn the machine off then on. Check the LSU opera

2. Print a demo page and check the quality of the prin


ntout.
3. If the problem persists, check the following.
a. LSU operational sound occurs.
1) Check the LSU motor signals by SVC mode.
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines>110-0000)
2) Check
Ch k if th
the motor
t ready
d signal
i l iis properly
l chang
h ged.(fron
d (f L
Low tto Hi
High)
h)
3) If the signal does not change, replace LSU(JC97
7-04219A).
(The Motor ready signal is not generated.)
b. LSU operational sound does not occur.
1) Turn the machine off.
2) After opening Front-Cover,
Front-Cover check the LSU harne
ess is connected correctly.
correctly

3) If the problem persists, replace LSU(JC97-04219A).

7-U
U-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Error code : ● Error message :


U2-1113 LSU Failure: #U2-1113. Turn off then on

● Symptom and Cause

Symptom :

- The LSU H-sync signal is abnormal.

Cause :
- LSU harness is disconnected or connected abnorm
mally.
- Laser Diode or LD Drive (Parts of LSU) is broken.
- LSU beam emits incorrectly. (Axis of the Laser Bea
am emission is abnormal)
- Control signals does not generate on Main Board.
- LSU Motor is broken.
broken Cycle of H-sync
H sync is irregular.
irregular

● Solution :

1. Turn the machine off then on.

2 Print a demo page and check the quality of the prin


2. ntout.
ntout
3. If the problem persists, check the following.
a. Turn the machine off.
1) After opening Front-Cover, check the LSU harne
ess is connected correctly.

2) If the problem persists, replace LSU(JC97-04219A).

7-U-10
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
U3-3211 Original paper jam inside of scanner
U3-3212
U3-3213
U3-3214
● Symptom / Cause:

Jam has occurred inside the DADF unit.

● Troubleshooting method:

ve it.
1. Open DADF cover. If there is jammed paper, remov

2. If this error occurs continually, check DADF regi. se


ensor(0604-001393) and Regi actuator (JC66–
03148A). If their operation is abnormal, replace the de
efective part.

3. If the regi sensor is OK, check the Scan sensor(06


604-001393) and Scan actuator(JC66–03210A).

If their operation is abnormal, replace the defective part.

4. Check if the regi. clutch operates normally. Check iff the clutch cable is connected correctly.

If Clutch(JC47–00033A) is defective, replace it.

7-U-11
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code
C d : ● Error
E message :
U3-3311 Original paper jam inside of scanner
U3-3312
U3-3313
U3-3314
● Symptom / Cause:

Jam has occurred inside the DADF unit.

● Troubleshooting method:

ve it.
1. Open DADF cover. If there is jammed paper, remov

2. If this error occurs continually,


y, check DADF regi.
g seensor(0604-001393)
( ) and Regi
g actuator ((JC66–
03148A). If their operation is abnormal, replace the de
efective part.

3. If the regi sensor is OK, check the Scan sensor(06


604-001393) and Scan actuator(JC66–03210A).

If their operation is abnormal, replace the defective part.

4. Check if the regi. clutch operates normally. Check iff the clutch cable is connected correctly.

If Clutch(JC47–00033A) is defective, replace it.

7-U-12
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code : ● Error message :


U3-3413 Original paper jam inside of scanner
U3-3414
● Symptom / Cause:

Jam has occurred inside the DADF unit.

● Troubleshooting method:

1 Open DADF cover


1. cover. If there is jammed paper,
paper remov
ve it.
it

2. If this error occurs continually, check the following:

es normally.
a) Check if Regi. actuator(JC66–03148A) operate

b) Check if the Regi. sensor cable is connected correctly.

c) If the problem persists, replace Regi. sensor(0604-001393).

7-U-13
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code : ● Error message :


U3-3513 Original paper jam inside of scanner
U3-3514
● Symptom
S t /C
Cause:

Jam has occurred inside the DADF unit.

● Troubleshooting method:

1 O
1. Open DADF cover. Iff there is jammed paper, remov
ve it.

2. If this error occurs continually, check the following:

s normally.
a) Check if Scan actuator(JC66-03210A) operates

b) Check if the scan sensor cable is connected corrrectly.

c) If the connection is OK, replace Scan sensor(06


604-001393).

7-U-14
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code : ● Error message :


U3-3611 Original paper jam in exit area of scanner
U3-3613
U3-3614
● Symptom / Cause:

Jam has occurred inside the DADF unit.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Open DADF cover. If there is jammed paper, remov


ve it.

2. If this error occurs continually, check the following:

a) Check if Exit actuator(JC66-03184A) operates normally.

b) Check if the exit sensor cable is connected corre


ectly.

c) If the problem persists


persists, replace Exit sensor(0604
4 001393)
4-001393).

7-U-15
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7. Troubles
shooting

● Code : ● Error message :


U3-4210 Top door of scanner is op
pen.

● Symptom / Cause:

DADF cover is open.

● Troubleshooting method:

1. Close DADF cover properly.

2. If this error occurs continually, Check the following:

a) Check DADF cover open sensor(0604-001393)) and the harness. If there is a defective part, replace
it.

en Rib. If it is broken, replace Cover-Open(JC63-


b) If both of them are normal, check the Cover-Ope
03273A).
)

7-U-16
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3 Image quality problems and solutions

■ Print-Quality Problems Overview

Print-quality defects can be attributed to printer compon


nents, consumables, media, internal software,
external software applications and environmental conditions. To successfully troubleshoot print-quality
problems, as many variables as possible must be eliminated. The first step is to generate prints using
printable pages embedded in the printer on laser paperr. The paper should be from an unopened ream that
has been acclimated to room temperature and you sho ould ensure that genuine Samsung Toner is installed
in the printer.

7-110
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.1 Vertical Lines

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item


m Result Action
1 LSU The surface of the LSU
U window is Yes Clean the LSU window.
dirty.
2 Imaging unit The surface of the OPC
C drum is Yes Change imaging unit
unit.
scratched.
3 Contact terminals make
e good No Clean contact terminals.
connection between im
maging unit
and machine.
4 Developing bias contac
ct terminal No Clean contact terminal
makes good connectionn. and check terminal
position.
iti
5 Scanner Original is damaged or dirty. Yes Change original.
6 Scanner glass white sh
heet is dirty. Yes Clean or replace the pad.
7 Original glass is dirty. Yes Wipe the surface clean
with a soft cloth.
8 Mirror is dirty
dirty. Yes Clean the contaminated
Lamp is dirty. part.
Reflectors are dirty. Caution
Fragile parts!
9 Remove the lens coverr by Yes Clean the contaminated
undoing 2 screws. Che eck CCD part.
lens surface against Caution
contamination or foreig
gn objects
objects. Fragile parts!

7-111
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.2 Horizontal Lines

A. Typical
yp faulty
y images
g

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item


m Result Action
1 Image check A white line or black in main scan Yes Clean contact terminals.
direction is sharp.
2 Imaging unit C drum is
The surface of the OPC Yes Change imaging unit.
scratched.
3 Dirty on the outside. Yes Clean.
4 Contact terminals make
e good No Clean contact terminals.
connection between ea
ach imaging
unit and machine.
5 Developing bias contac
ct terminal No Clean contact terminal
makes good connectionn. and check terminal
position.
position
6 LSU The surface of the LSU
U window is Yes Clean the LSU.
dirty.
7 The problem has been eliminated No Change LSU.
through the checks of steps
s up to 6.
8 Scanner Original is damaged or dirty. Yes Change original.
9 DADF pad is dirty. Yes Clean or replace the pad.
10 Original glass is dirty. Yes Wipe the surface clean
with a soft cloth.
11 Remove lens cover by undoing 2 Yes Clean the contaminated
screws. Check CCD len ns surface part.
against contamination or
o foreign Caution
objects
objects. Fragile parts!

7-112
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.3 White spot

A. Typical
yp faulty
y images
g

B Troubleshooting procedure
B.

Step Section Check item


m Result Action
1 Image check There are void areas att the front Yes 1. Change paper to one
side or high density sec
ction. just
2 There is void area at th
he rear side Yes unwrapped from its
section.
section package.
2. Print the image on
recycled paper mode.
3 Imaging unit ct terminal
Developing bias contac No Clean contact terminal
makes good connectionn and check terminal
position.
4 The surface of the OPC
C drum is Yes Change imaging unit.
scratched or contamina
ated
ated.
5 Dirty on the outside. Yes Clean.
6 Toner cartridge Foreign matter or caked toner in Yes Remove foreign matter.
the toner cartridge.
7 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller is dirty or
o Yes Change 2nd image
scratched. transfer roller unit.

8 Paper path There is foreign matter on paper Yes Remove foreign matter.
path.
9 HV terminal HV output is abnormal. Yes Change the HVPS board.
10 DADF DADF pad is dirty. Yes Clean.
11 Original glass Original glass is dirty. Yes Wipe the surface clean
with a soft cloth
cloth.

7-113
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.4 Color or Black background

A. Typical
yp faulty
y images
g

B. Troubleshooting procedure
Step Section Check item
m Result Action
1 Imaging unit HV terminal of imaging unit is dirty. Yes Clean the terminal.
2 Dirty on the outside due
e to scattered Yes Replace imaging unit with
toner new one
3 Oi i l
Original O i i l iis d
Original damaged
d or dirty.
di t Y
Yes Ch
Change original.
i i l
4 DADF DADF does not lie flat. Yes Change DADF if it is
deformed or hinges are
broken.
5 Original glass Original glass is dirty. Yes Wipe the surface clean
with a soft cloth.
6 Sh di sheet
Shading h t Sh di sheet
Shading h t Glass
Gl is dirty.
is di t Y
Yes Wipe th
Wi the surface
f clean
l
Glass with a soft cloth
7 Mirror, lens, Mirror is dirty. Yes Clean.
exposure lamp,
8 and reflectors Lens is dirty. Yes Clean.
9 Exposure lamp is dirty. Yes Clean.
10 Reflectors are dirty
dirty. Yes Clean
Clean.
11 Basic screen The problem is eliminatted when the No Try another exposure
quality/ density image is produced in th
he manual level in manual.
exposure setting.
12 The problem has been eliminated No Scan the Chart and check
through the checks of steps
s up to 10. the image quality again

7-114
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.5 Blurred image

A. Typical
yp faulty
y images
g
이미지를 표시할 수 없습니다 . 컴퓨터 메모리가 부족하여 이미지를 열 수 없거나 이미지가 손상되었습니다 . 컴퓨터를 다시 시작한

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item


m Result Action
1 Image check There is Blurred area at
a the Front Yes 1.Change paper to one
side section. just unwrapped from its
package.
2 There is Blurred area at
a the rear Yes
side section. 2. Print the image on Thin
paper mode.
3 LSU U window is
The surface of the LSU Yes Clean
dirty.
4 Imaging unit Dirty on the outside. Yes Clean
5 The problem has been eliminated No Change imaging unit.
through the checks of steps
s up to  Change LSU.
4.
5 Scanner Original does not lie fla
at. Yes Change original.
6 DADF does not lie flat. Yes Change DADF if it is
deformed or hinges are
broken (Refer to 3
broken. 3.12
12
DADF unit)
7 Remove lens cover by undoing 2 Yes Clean the contaminated
screws. Check CCD len ns surface part.
against contamination or
o foreign Caution
objects. Fragile parts!

7-115
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.6 Uneven pitch and jitter image

A. Typical faulty images

Paper feeding
direction

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item Result Action


1 Test Printing Print the halftone pattern. Yes Follow next steps.
Check if the jitter has occu
urred.
2 Imaging unit 1.35mm or 2.0mm or 2.3m mm or 2.7 Yes Replace the imaging unit.
mm periodic jitter has occ
curred.
3 Main Drive Unit 0.77mm or 1.1mm periodiic jitter has Yes Replace the Main Drive
occurred. unit.

4 Laser odic jitter


0.508mm or 0.65mm perio Yes Replace the Laser
Scanning Unit has occurred. Scanning Unit (LSU).
5 Regi roll Gear 1.25 or 2.5mm periodic jittter has Yes Replace the Regi Roll
occurred. Gear in main unit.
6 Imaging unit 94mm periodic jitter has occurred.
o Yes Replace the imaging unit.

7 Main Drive Unit After replacing the imaging unit, 94 Yes Replace the Main Drive
mm periodic jjitter or band has unit.
occurred.
8 Imaging unit 35mm or 62mm or 43mm periodic Yes Replace the imaging unit.
d.
jitter or band has occurred
9 Main Drive Unit After replacing the imaging unit, 35 Yes Replace the Main Drive
mm periodic jitter or band has unit.
occurred.
10 Transfer roller 55~56mm periodic band has
h Yes Replace the Transfer
occurred. roller.

7-116
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.7 Skewed image

A. Typical
yp faulty
y images
g

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item


m Result Action
1 Cassettes Is the cassette properly
y installed? No Reinstall the drawer or
LCF properly.

2 Is too much paper loaded in the No Reduce paper to 550


cassettes? sheets or less.
(2500 sheets or less/stack
for HCF)

3 Are the cassette side guides No Adjust the side guides.


properly set?
4 Paper feed roller Is the surface of paper feed roller Yes Clean the roller surface
dirty? with alcohol,
or replace the roller.
5 DADF Is the DADF installed and
a No Before ADF replacement
adjusted properly? perform mechanical ADF
levelling steps)
Reassembling DADF.
Retest. If no better then
replace ADF assy. Please
include mechanical ADF
levelling guide. After
above refer to 7.3.14
6 Image Transfer Is the transfer belt unit installed No Reseat it.
Belt (ITB) properl ?
properly?

7-117
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.8 Low image density

A. Typical
yp faulty
y images
g

AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
A BbC
AaB bCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item Result Action


1 Toner Toner is empty or toner exha
aust section Yes Change toner cartridge.
Cartridge is blocked.
2 LSU One of 2 beams is fail. Yes Change the LSU.
3 HVPS The output from the HVPS is
s abnormal. Yes Clean the HVPS terminal
The HVPS terminal is contam
minated. or Change it.

3 Imaging Unit Toner carriers and toner leve


el is too low Yes Check the high voltage
in imaging unit. terminal. Replace the
imaging unit.
4 Toner supply Connectors are loose. Yes Reconnect.
device
5 Motor is defective. Yes Change the toner supply
motor.

7-118
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.9 Blank copy , Black copy

A. Typical faulty images

Blank copy Black copy

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item Result Action


1 Image check A blank copy occurs. Yes Check LSU connector for
proper connection.
A black copy occurs Yes Check HVPS connector for
proper connection, especially,
Corona Charger and Grid
Voltage
2 Imaging unit Coupling of imaging unitt drive No Check and correct drive
mechanism is installed transmitting coupling. Change
properly. imaging unit.
3 The OPC drum charge corona
c No Check, clean, or correct the
voltage contact of OPC drum
d contact.
ground contact of the imaging
unit is connected properrly.
4 High voltage unit Connector is connected No Reconnect.
properly.
5 M i controller
Main t ll Connector
C t iis connected
t d N
No Reconnectt th
R the cable
bl
properly between video control board
and engine control board
6 The problem has been No Change high voltage unit.
eliminated through the check of  Change printer control
step 5. board
 Change LSU.
To be continued on next page…
7-119
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

Step Section Check item Result Action


7 Cable Connector is connected No Reconnect.
connecting nt.
properly with no pins ben
scanner and
printer
8 Scanner Connectors on the scann
ner No Reconnect.
board are connected pro
operly.
9 Connectors of the CCD unit
u No Reconnect.
are connected properly.
10 The problem is eliminate
ed as No Change I/F connection cable.
checked with the image on a
test pattern produced.
produced
11 The problem is eliminateed after No Change the scanner board.
the I/F connection cable has
been changed.

7-120
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.10 Uneven density in sub scan direction (Horizontal Band)

A. Typical
yp faulty
y images
g

AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item


m Result Action
1 Image Check The periodic 35 mm baand has Yes Change imaging unit.
occurred. (Magnetic Ro
oll)

2 Imaging unit The surface of the OPC


C drum is Yes Change imaging unit.
scratched.
3 Dirty on the outside. Yes Clean.
4 The problem has been eliminated No  Change LSU.
through the checks of steps
s up to  Change HVPS board.
4.

7-121
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.11 Uneven density in main scan direction


d (Vertical Band)

A. Typical
yp faulty
y images
g

AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc
AaBbCc

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item Result Action


1 Imaging unit The surface of the OPC drum
d is Yes Change imaging unit.
scratched.
2 Dirty on the outside. Yes Clean.
3 LSU The surface of the LSU window
w Yes Clean.
is dirty.
4 Transfer roller Check that the spring doe es not No Correct.
come of during the pressu ure Change transfer roller unit.
operation
p of the transfer roller.
5 The problem has been No Change imaging unit.
eliminated through the checks of  Change LSU.
steps up to 4.  Change HVPS board.

7-122
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.12 Poor fusing performance

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting procedure

Step Section Check item Result Action


1 Paper Check the paper type. No Set the paper type on
control panel.
2 Check if the recommended
d paper is No Use the recommended
used. paper.
3 Fuser Unit The fuser unit is worn out.(150K) Yes Replace the fuser unit.
4 Check if the surface of the fuser belt Yes Replace the fuser unit.
& pressure roller is scratched.

5 1. Check the pressure rolle


er is No Change the fuser
abnormal. pressure motor.
2. Does fuser pressure (NIPP) motor
operate when opening or closing side
nd.
cover. Listen to motor soun

6 Check if the heat roller con


ntrol No Check the NC Sensor.
temperature is too high or low.
7 Check resistance of both heating Yes Change the heating lamp.
lamps.

7-123
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.13 Stain on the paper back side

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting
g procedure
p

Step Section Check item Result Action


1 Image Is the margin adjustment of No Adjust the margin and
adjustment image correct? magnifications
2 Paper feeding Does the size of paper in the No Use the appropriate paper
drawer or DCF/HCF corre espond size or correct the size
to the setting? setting.
3 Transfer roller Are the feed roller and tra
ansfer Yes Clean or replace the rollers.
roller dirty or worn out?
4 Fuser unit Are the fuser belt and pre
essure Yes Clean the fuser belt and
roller dirty? pressure roller.
5 Is the rib of transport guid
de Yes Clean the rib.
dirty?

7-124
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.3.14 DADF skew testing

After re-installing the DADF, you need to conduct the


e DADF skew test using the DADF test chart which
supplied with DADF.

1. Load the A4 (or LTR) DADF test chart face up into


o the DADF.

2. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size


e.

7-125
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

3. Press Copy from the display screen.

4. Press Start from the control panel to begin copying.

7-126
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

5. Compare the condition of the printout with the DADDF test chart.
For example, the length of scale marks in the circles is equivalent (acceptable range by less or more than
0.5 mm), it means the DADF was installed well.

7-127
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

Otherwise, adjust the DADF using the screw at the backside and handle hinge as shown by the examples
e is 1mm shorter than that of right side, move the
below. For example, the length of scale on the left side
steel plate toward the rear side by two scale marks using the screw at the backside and handle hinge. A
scale mark is approximately 0.5 mm.

7-128
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

For example, the length of scale on the left side is 1m


mm longer than that of right side, move the steel plate
toward the front side by two scale marks using the sc crew at the backside and handle hinge. A scale mark
is approximately 0.5 mm.

7-129
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

7.4 Other errors

7.4.1 OPE problem

● Symptom

The LCD panel does not display anything on.


● Possible cause

1. Power is not supplied to OPE.


2. OPE is defective.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Is power supplied to OPE?

Yes : If there is any problem, check if power is supp


plied to HUB PBA.
Check if power is supplied to engine controllerr.

- CN4 : Pin No.9,12 , Check the voltage by DVM.


D (Normal value : 5V)
- U2 : Pin No.2 , Check the voltage by DVM.. (Normal value : 3.3V)

Replace the SMPS board.

No : Replace the OPE board.

7-130
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

● Symptom

The touch screen does not work.


● Possible cause

1. OPE is defective.

● Troubleshooting method :

Replace the OPE. Re-check the operation.

7-131
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

● Symptom

Touch screen does not operate properly.


● Possible cause

The linearity value for touch panel has changed due to


o using a machine long hours or surroundings.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Turn off the machine.


2. While pressing the number 0 on numeric keys, turn on the machine. Wait until the calibration screen
appears.

3. Press centre of mark + following order 1-9. Use stylus. Perform 2 times.

4. If there is no problem, “Complete” will appear on LC


CD and reboot the machine.
When making a mistake, start again from the step 1.

7-132
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

● Symptom

The keyboard does not operate.


● Possible cause

1. Keyboard is defective.
2. OPE is defective.
3. HUB PBA is not supplied with power.
● Troubleshooting method :

1. Replace the keyboard. Check its operation again.


2. Replace the OPE. Check its operation again.
3. Check if power is supplied to the HUB PBA.
4. Replace the engine controller.
5. Replace the DC relay PBA.

7.4.2 USB port problem

● Symptom

USB port on front side does not work.


● Possible cause

1. HUB PBA is defective.


2. Power is not supplied to HUB PBA.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Replace the HUB PBA. Check its operation again.


2. Check if power is supplied to the HUB PBA.
3. Replace the engine controller.
4. Replace
p the DC relay
y PBA.

7-133
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
7.Troubles
shooting

● Symptom

1. USB port on back side does not work.


2. USB device port does not work.
3. Wired network does not work.
● Possible cause

Video controller is defective.

● Troubleshooting method :

Replace the video controller.

7.4.3 FDI device problem

● Symptom

FDI device does not work.


● Possible cause

1. FDI interface card is defective.


2. Video controller is defective.

● Troubleshooting method :

1. Replace the FDI interface card. Check its operation


n again.
2. Replace the video controller.

7-134
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
8.System Diagram

8. System Diagram
8 1 Engine 1
8.1

8-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
8.System Diagram

8 2 Engine 2
8.2

8-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
8.System Diagram

8 3 Engine 3
8.3

8-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
8.System Diagram

8 4 Scan & DADF


8.4

8-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
8.System Diagram

8 5 Heater & Fuse


8.5

8-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

9 System
9. S t R
Recovery

This Application allows administrator to recover the system to factory default state if a Hard Disk failure
ce Administrator.
occurs. This application will primarily be used by Devic

9.1 Entry Point

The entry point for the application is login page along with
w an option to select the recovery method. The UI
displays the below page when System failure happens s during boot up.

9.1.1 Select Recovery Method

User can select any one of the following options depen


nding upon the recovery method.

1) HDD Format:
a) Hidden Partition
b) USB
c) Network
2) HDD Repair

9-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

9.1.2 Login Details

User enters the Password details for performing autheentication through the UI control provided on the login
page. The password will be 1934 as the factory setting
g password.

9.1.3 Next button

The Next button is pressed for starting the authentication process.

On successful authentication:
• The user will be directed to the USB page, Network
N page or HDD repair page depending upon
selection of USB option or Net
Network
ork option re
especti el or Repair option
espectively option.
• The user will be directed to the Confirmation page if there is no error or to Error page (section 3.5)
with appropriate error message when Hidden n Partition option is selected.

On authentication failure:
• The Error page (section 3.5) will be displayed along with the failure message.

9.2 USB

It is the basic screen when user selects the USB option


n from the login page.

9.2.1 Next button

9-2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

The Next button is pressed after inserting the USB stic


ck.
The system will check for the required packages in thee USB stick. If all the packages are present in the
USB stick then the system will be directed to the confirmation page otherwise an Error page will be
displayed with an appropriate error message.

Caution - Use min 2GB USB stick or bigger for HDD Recovery.

9.2.2 Back button

The Back button is pressed if any point of time the use


er wants to go back to the login page
page. The Safe to
remove USB button will safely remove the USB devic ce and goes to the previous page.

9-3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

9 3 Network
9.3 N t k
This page contains two sections :

1. Configure device IP address


2. Configure samba settings

9.3.1 Configure device IP address

This section provides following configurable options:


1. Device IP: IP address for the device
2. Gateway IP: Gateway IP address for the de evice
3 S
3. Subnet
b M
Mask:
k NNetworkkS
Subnet
b M
Mask k ffor the
he device
d i

9.3.2 Configure samba settings

This section provides following options to configure the e settings for the server, which will be accessed by
the device to recover the system:
1. Server IP : IP address of the server.
2. User ID : user ID of the server to login into the
t server system
3. Password : password of the server system
4. Shared folder : name of the shared folder on the server, where the packages for the system
recovery are present.

9-4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

9 3 3 Next button
9.3.3

The Next button is pressed after providing the above in


nformation.
The system will establish the provided IP to the device
e and try to connect to the server and check for the
available packages on the server.
nt in the shared folder of the server then the system
If Network is establish and all the packages are presen
will be directed to the Confirmation page otherwise an Error page will be displayed with an appropriate error
message.

9.3.4 Back button

The Back button is pressed if any point of time the use


er wants to go back to the login page.

9.4 Confirmation Page

This is the confirmation page, which will display a mes


ssage “HDD will be formatted. Do you want to
proceed?”

9.4.1 Next button


When the user clicks Next button then the actual recov
very
y of the system
y will take p
place.
The user will be directed to the Progress page.

9.4.2 Home button


The Home button is pressed if any point of time the us
ser wants to go back to the login page.

9-5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

9 5 Error
9.5 E Page
P
This is the Error page, which will display an appropriatte message depending upon the type of error
occurred.

9.5.1 Home button


The Home button is provided to go back to the Login page.
p

9-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

9 6 Progress
9.6 P P
Page

This page provides the progress information in percen


ntage.

After every second the progress information is display


yed till the progress reaches 100%. The system will
be rebooted after the recovery. So the following page needs to be displayed.

9-7
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

9 7 Error
9.7 E List
Li t

9.7.1 Authentication

In case authentication fails, UI should display an error message “Login Failed: Enter Login details again”.

9.7.2 Package error

When the packages are not found then the UI should display
d the error message corresponding to the
missing packages in case of Hidden Partition, USB and Network.

9.7.3 Network error

When the network is not established or samba settingss are failed then the UI should display the
corresponding error message related to network failure
e.

9.8 HDD Repair


Hard disk file system check can be done by HDD repa
air feature.

9-8
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

9.8.1 Next button

When the user clicks Next button then the HDD repairr of the system will take place.

Once the HDD repair successfully the system will rebo


oot and boot via HDD by running the Everest binary.

9-9
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
9. System Recovery

9 9 HDD F
9.9 Failure
il

In case of Hard disk failure, the system will display the


e below message, Please ensure that the HDD cables
are properly connected and then turn OFF and then turn ON the machine once. If the machine doesn’t boot
normally please refer to troubleshooting for error code.

10
9-1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
10. Reference
e Information

10 R
10. Reference
f IInforma
f ation
ti

This chapter contains the tools list, list of abbreviations


s used in this manual.

10.1 Tools for Troubleshootiing

The following tools are recommended safe and easy trroubleshooting as described in this service manual.

Tool Image Use Remark


1.Spanner
1 Spanner When installing the desk wheel
wheel. Installation
(More than 15mm)

2.Hand DVM Checking the fuser lamp. Service


(More than 3 digits) Checking the SMPS fuse.

3.Spring hook When disassembling the spring. Service


(More than 3mm )

4. Small vacuum To remove the toner and Service


contamination inside of the
machine .

10--1
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
10. Reference
e Information

Tool Image Use Remark

5. Driver To tighten screws. Service


(M3 long, M3 short, To remove the hinge of the
M2 long, M2 short) cover.
To adjust a finisher dip switch
switch.

6. Tweezers To unplug the pin connector of Service


(
(small
ll ttype)) the fuser unit
unit.
To remove the E-ring.

7. Cotton Swab When cleaning rollers. Service


- Transfer roller
- Regi roller

8 Soft cloth
8. To clean the frame and scan Service
glass.

10 Bl
10. Black
k cloth
l th T cover the
To th OPC off the
th S i
Service
imaging unit.

10. Measuring tape To check the installation space Installation

10--2
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
10. Reference
e Information

Tool Image Use Remark

11. Install guide, When installing the machine. Installation


Reference guide

12. Software CD When installing the machine. Installation

13. Test chart To check the image quality Service

( image,
(A4 g , A3 image,
g ,
Skew )

14. Spare kit To fix the unit or parts Service

(Screw, E-Ring)

15. Clamp To form the harness Service

16. Grease To remove the noise by gear. Service

1. G-8050 : JC81-08663A (200g)


For fuser unit
2. SPY272 : JC81-08664A
(100g)
For feeding section
(Pick up,
up MP,
MP Duplex)

10--3
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
10. Reference
e Information

10.2 Abbreviations

The table below explains the abbreviations used in this


s service manual.

ADC Analog to digital convert


AMS A li ti M
Application Managementt S
System
t m
BD PBA Beam Detector PBA
CCD Charge-Coupled Device
CMS Color Management System
CRUM Customer Replaceable Unit Mod
dule
DADF Duplex Automatic Document Fee
eder
DCF Double Cassette Feeder

DDR2 Double Data Rate 2


DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module
ECP Enhanced Capability Port
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programma
able Read-Only Memory
ESD Electrostatically Sensitive(ES) Devices
D
FCON PBA FAX Controller Board
FCOT First Copy Output Time
FDI Foreign Device Interface
FFC Flexible Flat Cable
FRR Feed and Reverse Roller
HCF High Capacity Feeder
HCF High Capacity Feeder

HR Heat roller
HVPS High Voltage Power Supply
ICON PBA Image Controller Board
IPM Images Per Minutes
IPP Internet Printing Protocols
ITB Imaging
g g transfer belt
LCD liquid crystal display
LPEC3 LBP ENGINE CONTROL ASIC (LPEC3)
(
MSOK Master System Operator Key
NIC Network Interface Card

10--4
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
10. Reference
e Information

NTC thermistor Negative temperature coefficientt thermistor


NVM Non-Volatile Memory
PCI Peripheral Component Interconn
nect
PDF Portable Document Format
PM Preventive Maintenance
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
RISC reduced instruction set computerr
SMPS Switched-mode power supply
SNMP Simple
p Network Management
g Prrotocol
SWS Samsung Web Services
SWS Safety Warning System
SyncThru Samsung network sync management program
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/In
nternet Protocol
TFT Thin-Film
Thin Film Transistor
TIFF (Adobe & Aldus) Tagged Image File Format
TRC Control Tone Reproduction Curve Cotrol
UART Universal Asynchronous Receive
er and... Receiver and Transmitter
UI User Interface
VPU Visual Processing Unit
WNPC Wireless LAN Module supports Network
N Card
XOA Extensible Open Architecture
XPS X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscop
py

10--5
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
10. Reference Information

10.3 Document Revision List

Version Date Page Description


2.00 08/Aug/2014 - Add version and document revision list
2.01 12/Nov/2014 2-1,2,61,63 Memory size is changed from 1GB to 2GB.
(The machine produced after 1st. Dec. is
applied.)

10-6
Service Manual SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS
GSPN (GLOBAL SERVICE PARTNER NETWORK)
Area Web Site

Europe, MENA,
https://gspn1.samsungcsportal.com
CIS, Africa
E.Asia, W.Asia,
https://gspn2.samsungcsportal.com
China, Japan
N.America, S.America https://gspn3.samsungcsportal.com

This Service Manual is a property of Samsung Electronics


© 2012 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
Co.,Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Any unauthorized use of Manual can be punished under
Printed in Korea
applicable International and/or domestic law.
Code No.:

You might also like